Annotation of GNUtools/cc/tm.texi, revision 1.1.1.1

1.1       root        1: @c Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
                      2: @c This is part of the GCC manual.
                      3: @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
                      4: 
                      5: @node Target Macros
                      6: @chapter Target Description Macros
                      7: @cindex machine description macros
                      8: @cindex target description macros
                      9: @cindex macros, target description
                     10: @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
                     11: 
                     12: In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
                     13: includes a C header file conventionally given the name
                     14: @file{@var{machine}.h}.  This header file defines numerous macros
                     15: that convey the information about the target machine that does not fit
                     16: into the scheme of the @file{.md} file.  The file @file{tm.h} should be
                     17: a link to @file{@var{machine}.h}.  The header file @file{config.h}
                     18: includes @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include
                     19: @file{config.h}.
                     20: 
                     21: @menu
                     22: * Driver::              Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
                     23: * Run-time Target::     Defining @samp{-m} options like @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}.
                     24: * Storage Layout::      Defining sizes and alignments of data.
                     25: * Type Layout::         Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
                     26: * Registers::           Naming and describing the hardware registers.
                     27: * Register Classes::    Defining the classes of hardware registers.
                     28: * Stack and Calling::   Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
                     29: * Varargs::            Defining the varargs macros.
                     30: * Trampolines::         Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
                     31: * Library Calls::       Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
                     32: * Addressing Modes::    Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
                     33: * Condition Code::      Defining how insns update the condition code.
                     34: * Costs::               Defining relative costs of different operations.
                     35: * Sections::            Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
                     36: * PIC::                        Macros for position independent code.
                     37: * Assembler Format::    Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
                     38: * Debugging Info::      Defining the format of debugging output.
                     39: * Cross-compilation::   Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
                     40: * Misc::                Everything else.
                     41: @end menu
                     42: 
                     43: @node Driver
                     44: @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
                     45: @cindex driver
                     46: @cindex controlling the compilation driver
                     47: 
                     48: @table @code
                     49: @findex SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
                     50: @item SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{char})
                     51: A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
                     52: takes arguments.  The value should be the number of arguments that
                     53: option takes--zero, for many options.
                     54: 
                     55: By default, this macro is defined to handle the standard options
                     56: properly.  You need not define it unless you wish to add additional
                     57: options which take arguments.
                     58: 
                     59: @findex WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
                     60: @item WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{name})
                     61: A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{name}}
                     62: takes arguments.  The value should be the number of arguments that
                     63: option takes--zero, for many options.  This macro rather than
                     64: @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} is used for multi-character option names.
                     65: 
                     66: By default, this macro is defined as
                     67: @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
                     68: properly.  You need not define @code{WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
                     69: wish to add additional options which take arguments.  Any redefinition
                     70: should call @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
                     71: additional options.
                     72: 
                     73: @findex SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
                     74: @item SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
                     75: A string-valued C expression which is nonempty if the linker needs a
                     76: space between the @samp{-L} or @samp{-o} option and its argument.
                     77: 
                     78: If this macro is not defined, the default value is 0.
                     79: 
                     80: @findex CPP_SPEC
                     81: @item CPP_SPEC
                     82: A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
                     83: pass to CPP.  It can also specify how to translate options you
                     84: give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the CPP.
                     85: 
                     86: Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
                     87: 
                     88: @findex NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
                     89: @item NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
                     90: If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
                     91: @code{__SIZE_TYPE__}.  The macro @code{__SIZE_TYPE__} must then be defined
                     92: by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
                     93: 
                     94: This should be defined if @code{SIZE_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
                     95: which are not accessible to the preprocessor.  Otherwise, it should not
                     96: be defined.
                     97: 
                     98: @findex NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
                     99: @item NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
                    100: If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
                    101: @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__}.  The macro @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__} must then be
                    102: defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
                    103: 
                    104: This should be defined if @code{PTRDIFF_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
                    105: which are not accessible to the preprocessor.  Otherwise, it should not
                    106: be defined.
                    107: 
                    108: @findex SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
                    109: @item SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
                    110: A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
                    111: pass to CPP.  By default, this macro is defined to pass the option
                    112: @samp{-D__CHAR_UNSIGNED__} to CPP if @code{char} will be treated as
                    113: @code{unsigned char} by @code{cc1}.
                    114: 
                    115: Do not define this macro unless you need to override the default
                    116: definition.
                    117: 
                    118: @findex CC1_SPEC
                    119: @item CC1_SPEC
                    120: A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
                    121: pass to @code{cc1}.  It can also specify how to translate options you
                    122: give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the @code{cc1}.
                    123: 
                    124: Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
                    125: 
                    126: @findex CC1PLUS_SPEC
                    127: @item CC1PLUS_SPEC
                    128: A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
                    129: pass to @code{cc1plus}.  It can also specify how to translate options you
                    130: give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
                    131: 
                    132: Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
                    133: 
                    134: @findex ASM_SPEC
                    135: @item ASM_SPEC
                    136: A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
                    137: pass to the assembler.  It can also specify how to translate options
                    138: you give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the assembler.
                    139: See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
                    140: 
                    141: Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
                    142: 
                    143: @findex ASM_FINAL_SPEC
                    144: @item ASM_FINAL_SPEC
                    145: A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program how to
                    146: run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
                    147: Normally, this is not needed.  See the file @file{mips.h} for
                    148: an example of this.
                    149: 
                    150: Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
                    151: 
                    152: @findex LINK_SPEC
                    153: @item LINK_SPEC
                    154: A C string constant that tells the GNU CC driver program options to
                    155: pass to the linker.  It can also specify how to translate options you
                    156: give to GNU CC into options for GNU CC to pass to the linker.
                    157: 
                    158: Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
                    159: 
                    160: @findex LIB_SPEC
                    161: @item LIB_SPEC
                    162: Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}.  The difference
                    163: between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
                    164: command given to the linker.
                    165: 
                    166: If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
                    167: loads the standard C library from the usual place.  See @file{gcc.c}.
                    168: 
                    169: @findex STARTFILE_SPEC
                    170: @item STARTFILE_SPEC
                    171: Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}.  The
                    172: difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
                    173: the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
                    174: 
                    175: If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
                    176: standard C startup file from the usual place.  See @file{gcc.c}.
                    177: 
                    178: @findex ENDFILE_SPEC
                    179: @item ENDFILE_SPEC
                    180: Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}.  The
                    181: difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
                    182: the very end of the command given to the linker.
                    183: 
                    184: Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
                    185: 
                    186: @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
                    187: @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
                    188: Define this macro meaning that @code{gcc} should find the library
                    189: @file{libgcc.a} by hand, rather than passing the argument @samp{-lgcc}
                    190: to tell the linker to do the search; also, @code{gcc} should not
                    191: generate @samp{-L} options to pass to the linker (as it normally does).
                    192: 
                    193: @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
                    194: @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
                    195: Define this macro meaning that @code{gcc} should find the
                    196: library @file{libgcc.a} by hand, rather than passing the argument
                    197: @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
                    198: 
                    199: @findex RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
                    200: @item RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
                    201: Define this macro to tell @code{gcc} that it should only translate
                    202: a @samp{-B} prefix into a @samp{-L} linker option if the prefix
                    203: indicates an absolute file name.
                    204: 
                    205: @findex STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
                    206: @item STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
                    207: Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
                    208: standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/gcc-lib/} as the default prefix to
                    209: try when searching for the executable files of the compiler.
                    210: 
                    211: @findex MD_EXEC_PREFIX
                    212: @item MD_EXEC_PREFIX
                    213: If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
                    214: @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.  @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
                    215: when the @samp{-b} option is used, or the compiler is built as a cross
                    216: compiler.
                    217: 
                    218: @findex STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
                    219: @item STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
                    220: Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
                    221: standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/} as the default prefix to
                    222: try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
                    223: 
                    224: @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
                    225: @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
                    226: If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
                    227: standard prefixes.  @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
                    228: @samp{-b} option is used, or when the compiler is built as a cross
                    229: compiler.
                    230: 
                    231: @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
                    232: @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
                    233: If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
                    234: standard prefixes.  It is not searched when the @samp{-b} option is
                    235: used, or when the compiler is built as a cross compiler.
                    236: 
                    237: @findex LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
                    238: @item LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
                    239: Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
                    240: standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
                    241: try when searching for local header files.  @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
                    242: comes before @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
                    243: 
                    244: Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
                    245: @file{/usr/local/include} or its replacement.
                    246: 
                    247: @findex SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
                    248: @item SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
                    249: Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to specify a
                    250: system-specific directory to search for header files before the standard
                    251: directory.  @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} comes before
                    252: @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
                    253: 
                    254: Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search the directory
                    255: specified.
                    256: 
                    257: @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
                    258: @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
                    259: Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
                    260: standard choice of @file{/usr/include} as the default prefix to
                    261: try when searching for header files.
                    262: 
                    263: Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
                    264: @file{/usr/include} or its replacement.
                    265: 
                    266: @findex INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
                    267: @item INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
                    268: Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
                    269: for include files.  The default search path includes
                    270: @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
                    271: @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
                    272: @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}.  In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
                    273: and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
                    274: and specify private search areas for GCC.  The directory
                    275: @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
                    276: 
                    277: The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
                    278: Each array element should have two elements: the directory name (a
                    279: string constant) and a flag for C++-only directories.  Mark the end of
                    280: the array with a null element.  For example, here is the definition used
                    281: for VMS:
                    282: 
                    283: @example
                    284: #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
                    285: @{                                       \
                    286:   @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", 1@},             \
                    287:   @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", 0@},              \
                    288:   @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0@},        \
                    289:   @{ ".", 0@},                            \
                    290:   @{ 0, 0@}                               \
                    291: @}
                    292: @end example
                    293: @end table
                    294: 
                    295: Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
                    296: 
                    297: @enumerate
                    298: @item
                    299: Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
                    300: 
                    301: @item
                    302: The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
                    303: 
                    304: @item
                    305: The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
                    306: 
                    307: @item
                    308: The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
                    309: 
                    310: @item
                    311: @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
                    312: 
                    313: @item
                    314: The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
                    315: @end enumerate
                    316: 
                    317: Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
                    318: 
                    319: @enumerate
                    320: @item
                    321: Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
                    322: 
                    323: @item
                    324: The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
                    325: 
                    326: @item
                    327: The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}.
                    328: 
                    329: @item
                    330: The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
                    331: 
                    332: @item
                    333: @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
                    334: 
                    335: @item
                    336: The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
                    337: 
                    338: @item
                    339: The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if any.
                    340: 
                    341: @item
                    342: The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}.
                    343: 
                    344: @item
                    345: @file{/lib/}.
                    346: 
                    347: @item
                    348: @file{/usr/lib/}.
                    349: @end enumerate
                    350: 
                    351: @node Run-time Target
                    352: @section Run-time Target Specification
                    353: @cindex run-time target specification
                    354: @cindex predefined macros
                    355: @cindex target specifications
                    356: 
                    357: @table @code
                    358: @findex CPP_PREDEFINES
                    359: @item CPP_PREDEFINES
                    360: Define this to be a string constant containing @samp{-D} options to
                    361: define the predefined macros that identify this machine and system.
                    362: These macros will be predefined unless the @samp{-ansi} option is
                    363: specified.
                    364: 
                    365: In addition, a parallel set of macros are predefined, whose names are
                    366: made by appending @samp{__} at the beginning and at the end.  These
                    367: @samp{__} macros are permitted by the ANSI standard, so they are
                    368: predefined regardless of whether @samp{-ansi} is specified.
                    369: 
                    370: For example, on the Sun, one can use the following value:
                    371: 
                    372: @smallexample
                    373: "-Dmc68000 -Dsun -Dunix"
                    374: @end smallexample
                    375: 
                    376: The result is to define the macros @code{__mc68000__}, @code{__sun__}
                    377: and @code{__unix__} unconditionally, and the macros @code{mc68000},
                    378: @code{sun} and @code{unix} provided @samp{-ansi} is not specified.
                    379: 
                    380: @findex STDC_VALUE
                    381: @item STDC_VALUE
                    382: Define the value to be assigned to the built-in macro @code{__STDC__}.
                    383: The default is the value @samp{1}.
                    384: 
                    385: @findex extern int target_flags
                    386: @item extern int target_flags;
                    387: This declaration should be present.
                    388: 
                    389: @cindex optional hardware or system features
                    390: @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
                    391: @item TARGET_@dots{}
                    392: This series of macros is to allow compiler command arguments to
                    393: enable or disable the use of optional features of the target machine.
                    394: For example, one machine description serves both the 68000 and
                    395: the 68020; a command argument tells the compiler whether it should
                    396: use 68020-only instructions or not.  This command argument works
                    397: by means of a macro @code{TARGET_68020} that tests a bit in
                    398: @code{target_flags}.
                    399: 
                    400: Define a macro @code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} for each such option.
                    401: Its definition should test a bit in @code{target_flags}; for example:
                    402: 
                    403: @smallexample
                    404: #define TARGET_68020 (target_flags & 1)
                    405: @end smallexample
                    406: 
                    407: One place where these macros are used is in the condition-expressions
                    408: of instruction patterns.  Note how @code{TARGET_68020} appears
                    409: frequently in the 68000 machine description file, @file{m68k.md}.
                    410: Another place they are used is in the definitions of the other
                    411: macros in the @file{@var{machine}.h} file.
                    412: 
                    413: @findex TARGET_SWITCHES
                    414: @item TARGET_SWITCHES
                    415: This macro defines names of command options to set and clear
                    416: bits in @code{target_flags}.  Its definition is an initializer
                    417: with a subgrouping for each command option.
                    418: 
                    419: Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the option
                    420: name, and a number, which contains the bits to set in
                    421: @code{target_flags}.  A negative number says to clear bits instead;
                    422: the negative of the number is which bits to clear.  The actual option
                    423: name is made by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
                    424: 
                    425: One of the subgroupings should have a null string.  The number in
                    426: this grouping is the default value for @code{target_flags}.  Any
                    427: target options act starting with that value.
                    428: 
                    429: Here is an example which defines @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}
                    430: with opposite meanings, and picks the latter as the default:
                    431: 
                    432: @smallexample
                    433: #define TARGET_SWITCHES \
                    434:   @{ @{ "68020", 1@},      \
                    435:     @{ "68000", -1@},     \
                    436:     @{ "", 1@}@}
                    437: @end smallexample
                    438: 
                    439: @findex TARGET_OPTIONS
                    440: @item TARGET_OPTIONS
                    441: This macro is similar to @code{TARGET_SWITCHES} but defines names of command
                    442: options that have values.  Its definition is an initializer with a
                    443: subgrouping for each command option. 
                    444: 
                    445: Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the fixed part
                    446: of the option name, and the address of a variable.  The variable, type
                    447: @code{char *}, is set to the variable part of the given option if the fixed
                    448: part matches.  The actual option name is made by appending @samp{-m} to the
                    449: specified name. 
                    450: 
                    451: Here is an example which defines @samp{-mshort-data-@var{number}}.  If the
                    452: given option is @samp{-mshort-data-512}, the variable @code{m88k_short_data}
                    453: will be set to the string @code{"512"}. 
                    454: 
                    455: @smallexample
                    456: extern char *m88k_short_data;
                    457: #define TARGET_OPTIONS \
                    458:  @{ @{ "short-data-", &m88k_short_data @} @}
                    459: @end smallexample
                    460: 
                    461: @findex TARGET_VERSION
                    462: @item TARGET_VERSION
                    463: This macro is a C statement to print on @code{stderr} a string
                    464: describing the particular machine description choice.  Every machine
                    465: description should define @code{TARGET_VERSION}.  For example:
                    466: 
                    467: @smallexample
                    468: #ifdef MOTOROLA
                    469: #define TARGET_VERSION \
                    470:   fprintf (stderr, " (68k, Motorola syntax)");
                    471: #else
                    472: #define TARGET_VERSION \
                    473:   fprintf (stderr, " (68k, MIT syntax)");
                    474: #endif
                    475: @end smallexample
                    476: 
                    477: @findex OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
                    478: @item OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
                    479: Sometimes certain combinations of command options do not make sense on
                    480: a particular target machine.  You can define a macro
                    481: @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS} to take account of this.  This macro, if
                    482: defined, is executed once just after all the command options have been
                    483: parsed.
                    484: 
                    485: Don't use this macro to turn on various extra optimizations for
                    486: @samp{-O}.  That is what @code{OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS} is for.
                    487: 
                    488: @findex OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS
                    489: @item OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS (@var{level})
                    490: Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
                    491: various optimization levels.   This macro, if defined, is executed once
                    492: just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
                    493: of the command options have been parsed.  Values set in this macro are
                    494: used as the default values for the other command line options.
                    495: 
                    496: @var{level} is the optimization level specified; 2 if -O2 is specified,
                    497: 1 if -O is specified, and 0 if neither is specified.
                    498: 
                    499: @strong{Do not examine @code{write_symbols} in this macro!}
                    500: The debugging options are not supposed to alter the generated code.
                    501: @end table
                    502: 
                    503: @node Storage Layout
                    504: @section Storage Layout
                    505: @cindex storage layout
                    506: 
                    507: Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
                    508: alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant.  They can be C
                    509: expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
                    510: @xref{Run-time Target}.
                    511: 
                    512: @table @code
                    513: @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
                    514: @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
                    515: Define this macro to be the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
                    516: byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to be the value zero.
                    517: This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
                    518: bit.  If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
                    519: be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to.
                    520: 
                    521: This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
                    522: bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
                    523: 
                    524: @findex BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
                    525: @item BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
                    526: Define this macro to be 1 if the most significant byte in a word has the
                    527: lowest number.
                    528: 
                    529: @findex WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
                    530: @item WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
                    531: Define this macro to be 1 if, in a multiword object, the most
                    532: significant word has the lowest number.  This applies to both memory
                    533: locations and registers; GNU CC fundamentally assumes that the order of
                    534: words in memory is the same as the order in registers.
                    535: 
                    536: @findex FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
                    537: @item FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
                    538: Define this macro to be 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
                    539: @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
                    540: containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to be
                    541: 0.
                    542: 
                    543: You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
                    544: multi-word integers.
                    545: 
                    546: @findex BITS_PER_UNIT
                    547: @item BITS_PER_UNIT
                    548: Define this macro to be the number of bits in an addressable storage
                    549: unit (byte); normally 8.
                    550: 
                    551: @findex BITS_PER_WORD
                    552: @item BITS_PER_WORD
                    553: Number of bits in a word; normally 32.
                    554: 
                    555: @findex MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
                    556: @item MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
                    557: Maximum number of bits in a word.  If this is undefined, the default is
                    558: @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.  Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
                    559: largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
                    560: 
                    561: @findex UNITS_PER_WORD
                    562: @item UNITS_PER_WORD
                    563: Number of storage units in a word; normally 4.
                    564: 
                    565: @findex MAX_UNITS_PER_WORD
                    566: @item MAX_UNITS_PER_WORD
                    567: Maximum number of units in a word.  If this is undefined, the default is
                    568: @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}.  Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
                    569: largest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
                    570: 
                    571: @findex POINTER_SIZE
                    572: @item POINTER_SIZE
                    573: Width of a pointer, in bits.
                    574: 
                    575: @findex PROMOTE_MODE
                    576: @item PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
                    577: A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
                    578: is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
                    579: stored in a register.  This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
                    580: scalar type.
                    581: 
                    582: On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
                    583: register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
                    584: @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.  In most
                    585: cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
                    586: floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
                    587: counterparts.
                    588: 
                    589: For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
                    590: However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
                    591: either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes.  For example, on
                    592: the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
                    593: sign-extend the result to 64 bits.  On such machines, set
                    594: @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
                    595: 
                    596: Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
                    597: 
                    598: @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
                    599: @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
                    600: Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
                    601: should also be done for outgoing function arguments.  
                    602: 
                    603: @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
                    604: @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
                    605: Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
                    606: should also be done for the return value of functions.
                    607: 
                    608: If this macro is defined, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} must perform the same
                    609: promotions done by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}.
                    610: 
                    611: @findex PARM_BOUNDARY
                    612: @item PARM_BOUNDARY
                    613: Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
                    614: bits.  All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
                    615: regardless of data type.  On most machines, this is the same as the
                    616: size of an integer.
                    617: 
                    618: @findex STACK_BOUNDARY
                    619: @item STACK_BOUNDARY
                    620: Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for
                    621: the stack pointer.  The definition is a C expression
                    622: for the desired alignment (measured in bits).
                    623: 
                    624: @cindex @code{PUSH_ROUNDING}, interaction with @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}
                    625: If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is not defined, the stack will always be aligned
                    626: to the specified boundary.  If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined and specifies a
                    627: less strict alignment than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, the stack may be
                    628: momentarily unaligned while pushing arguments.
                    629: 
                    630: @findex FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
                    631: @item FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
                    632: Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
                    633: 
                    634: @findex BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
                    635: @item BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
                    636: Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in bits.
                    637: 
                    638: @findex BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
                    639: @item BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
                    640: Biggest alignment that any structure field can require on this machine,
                    641: in bits.  If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
                    642: structure fields only.
                    643: 
                    644: @findex MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
                    645: @item MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
                    646: Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
                    647: Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
                    648: @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.  If not defined,
                    649: the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
                    650: 
                    651: @findex DATA_ALIGNMENT
                    652: @item DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
                    653: If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a static
                    654: variable.  @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is the
                    655: alignment that the object would ordinarily have.  The value of this
                    656: macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
                    657: 
                    658: If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
                    659: 
                    660: @findex strcpy
                    661: One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
                    662: make it all fit in fewer cache lines.  Another is to cause character
                    663: arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
                    664: constants to character arrays can be done inline.
                    665: 
                    666: @findex CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
                    667: @item CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
                    668: If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
                    669: that is being placed in memory.  @var{constant} is the constant and
                    670: @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
                    671: have.  The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
                    672: align the object.
                    673: 
                    674: If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
                    675: 
                    676: The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
                    677: constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
                    678: constants can be done inline.
                    679: 
                    680: @findex EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
                    681: @item EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
                    682: Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit field that follows an
                    683: empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
                    684: 
                    685: Note that @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} also affects the alignment
                    686: that results from an empty field.
                    687: 
                    688: @findex STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
                    689: @item STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
                    690: Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
                    691: Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
                    692: 
                    693: If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
                    694: @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
                    695: 
                    696: @findex STRICT_ALIGNMENT
                    697: @item STRICT_ALIGNMENT
                    698: Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
                    699: if given data not on the nominal alignment.  If instructions will merely
                    700: go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
                    701: 
                    702: @findex PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
                    703: @item PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
                    704: Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
                    705: alignment of bitfields and the structures that contain them.
                    706: 
                    707: The behavior is that the type written for a bitfield (@code{int},
                    708: @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the
                    709: entire structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary
                    710: field of that type.  In addition, the bitfield is placed within the
                    711: structure so that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a
                    712: boundary for it.
                    713: 
                    714: Thus, on most machines, a bitfield whose type is written as @code{int}
                    715: would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force four-byte
                    716: alignment for the whole structure.  (The alignment used may not be four
                    717: bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
                    718: 
                    719: If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
                    720: a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
                    721: 
                    722: Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
                    723: bitfields may cross more than one alignment boundary.  The compiler can
                    724: support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
                    725: @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
                    726: 
                    727: The other known way of making bitfields work is to define
                    728: @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
                    729: Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
                    730: 
                    731: Unless the machine has bitfield instructions or you define
                    732: @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
                    733: @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
                    734: 
                    735: If your aim is to make GNU CC use the same conventions for laying out
                    736: bitfields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
                    737: what the other compiler does.  Compile and run this program:
                    738: 
                    739: @example
                    740: struct foo1
                    741: @{
                    742:   char x;
                    743:   char :0;
                    744:   char y;
                    745: @};
                    746: 
                    747: struct foo2
                    748: @{
                    749:   char x;
                    750:   int :0;
                    751:   char y;
                    752: @};
                    753: 
                    754: main ()
                    755: @{
                    756:   printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
                    757:           sizeof (struct foo1));
                    758:   printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
                    759:           sizeof (struct foo2));
                    760:   exit (0);
                    761: @}
                    762: @end example
                    763: 
                    764: If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
                    765: get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
                    766: 
                    767: @findex BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
                    768: @item BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
                    769: Like PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS except that its effect is limited to
                    770: aligning a bitfield within the structure.
                    771: 
                    772: @findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE
                    773: @item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE (@var{struct}, @var{size}, @var{align})
                    774: Define this macro as an expression for the overall size of a structure 
                    775: (given by @var{struct} as a tree node) when the size computed from the
                    776: fields is @var{size} and the alignment is @var{align}.
                    777: 
                    778: The default is to round @var{size} up to a multiple of @var{align}.
                    779: 
                    780: @findex ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN
                    781: @item ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{struct}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
                    782: Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a structure 
                    783: (given by @var{struct} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the
                    784: usual way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
                    785: @var{specified}.
                    786: 
                    787: The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
                    788: the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
                    789: 
                    790: @findex MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
                    791: @item MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
                    792: An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
                    793: machine mode that should actually be used.  All integer machine modes of
                    794: this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
                    795: appropriate sizes.  If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
                    796: (DImode)} is assumed.
                    797: 
                    798: @findex CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE
                    799: @item CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE (@var{mode}, @var{value})
                    800: A C statement to validate the value @var{value} (of type
                    801: @code{double}) for mode @var{mode}.  This means that you check whether
                    802: @var{value} fits within the possible range of values for mode
                    803: @var{mode} on this target machine.  The mode @var{mode} is always
                    804: @code{SFmode} or @code{DFmode}.
                    805: 
                    806: @findex error
                    807: If @var{value} is not valid, you should call @code{error} to print an
                    808: error message and then assign some valid value to @var{value}.
                    809: Allowing an invalid value to go through the compiler can produce
                    810: incorrect assembler code which may even cause Unix assemblers to
                    811: crash.
                    812: 
                    813: This macro need not be defined if there is no work for it to do.
                    814: 
                    815: @findex TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
                    816: @item TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
                    817: A code distinguishing the floating point format of the target machine.
                    818: There are three defined values:
                    819: 
                    820: @table @code
                    821: @findex IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                    822: @item IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                    823: This code indicates IEEE floating point.  It is the default; there is no
                    824: need to define this macro when the format is IEEE.
                    825: 
                    826: @findex VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
                    827: @item VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
                    828: This code indicates the peculiar format used on the Vax.
                    829: 
                    830: @findex UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
                    831: @item UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
                    832: This code indicates any other format.
                    833: @end table
                    834: 
                    835: The value of this macro is compared with @code{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT}
                    836: (@pxref{Config}) to determine whether the target machine has the same
                    837: format as the host machine.  If any other formats are actually in use on
                    838: supported machines, new codes should be defined for them.
                    839: 
                    840: The ordering of the component words of floating point values stored in
                    841: memory is controlled by @code{FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the target
                    842: machine and @code{HOST_FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the host.
                    843: @end table
                    844: 
                    845: @node Type Layout
                    846: @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
                    847: 
                    848: These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
                    849: basic data types used in programs being compiled.  Unlike the macros in
                    850: the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
                    851: languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
                    852: 
                    853: @table @code
                    854: @findex INT_TYPE_SIZE
                    855: @item INT_TYPE_SIZE
                    856: A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
                    857: target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is one word.
                    858: 
                    859: @findex MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
                    860: @item MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
                    861: Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the target
                    862: machine.  If this is undefined, the default is @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE}.
                    863: Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the largest value that
                    864: @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time.  This is used in @code{cpp}.
                    865: 
                    866: @findex SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
                    867: @item SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
                    868: A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
                    869: target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
                    870: (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
                    871: unit.)
                    872: 
                    873: @findex LONG_TYPE_SIZE
                    874: @item LONG_TYPE_SIZE
                    875: A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
                    876: target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is one word.
                    877: 
                    878: @findex MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
                    879: @item MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
                    880: Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
                    881: target machine.  If this is undefined, the default is
                    882: @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.  Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
                    883: largest value that @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time.  This is
                    884: used in @code{cpp}.
                    885: 
                    886: @findex LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
                    887: @item LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
                    888: A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
                    889: target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is two
                    890: words.
                    891: 
                    892: @findex CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
                    893: @item CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
                    894: A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
                    895: target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is one quarter
                    896: of a word.  (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up
                    897: to one unit.)
                    898: 
                    899: @findex MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
                    900: @item MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
                    901: Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
                    902: target machine.  If this is undefined, the default is
                    903: @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.  Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
                    904: largest value that @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time.  This is
                    905: used in @code{cpp}.
                    906: 
                    907: @findex FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
                    908: @item FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
                    909: A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
                    910: target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is one word.
                    911: 
                    912: @findex DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
                    913: @item DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
                    914: A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
                    915: target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is two
                    916: words.
                    917: 
                    918: @findex LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
                    919: @item LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
                    920: A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
                    921: the target machine.  If you don't define this, the default is two
                    922: words.
                    923: 
                    924: @findex DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
                    925: @item DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
                    926: An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
                    927: @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default.  The user can
                    928: always override this default with the options @samp{-fsigned-char}
                    929: and @samp{-funsigned-char}.
                    930: 
                    931: @findex DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
                    932: @item DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
                    933: A C expression to determine whether to give an @code{enum} type 
                    934: only as many bytes as it takes to represent the range of possible values
                    935: of that type.  A nonzero value means to do that; a zero value means all
                    936: @code{enum} types should be allocated like @code{int}.
                    937: 
                    938: If you don't define the macro, the default is 0.
                    939: 
                    940: @findex SIZE_TYPE
                    941: @item SIZE_TYPE
                    942: A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
                    943: for size values.  The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
                    944: contents of the string.
                    945: 
                    946: The string can contain more than one keyword.  If so, separate them with
                    947: spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
                    948: appropriate, and finally @code{int}.  The string must exactly match one
                    949: of the data type names defined in the function
                    950: @code{init_decl_processing} in the file @file{c-decl.c}.  You may not
                    951: omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the compiler to
                    952: crash on startup.
                    953: 
                    954: If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
                    955: int"}.
                    956: 
                    957: @findex PTRDIFF_TYPE
                    958: @item PTRDIFF_TYPE
                    959: A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
                    960: for the result of subtracting two pointers.  The typedef name
                    961: @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string.  See
                    962: @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
                    963: 
                    964: If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
                    965: 
                    966: @findex WCHAR_TYPE
                    967: @item WCHAR_TYPE
                    968: A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
                    969: for wide characters.  The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
                    970: the contents of the string.  See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
                    971: information.
                    972: 
                    973: If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
                    974: 
                    975: @findex WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
                    976: @item WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
                    977: A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
                    978: characters.  This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
                    979: @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
                    980: 
                    981: @findex MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
                    982: @item MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
                    983: Maximum number for the size in bits of the data type for wide
                    984: characters.  If this is undefined, the default is
                    985: @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.  Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
                    986: largest value that @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time.  This is
                    987: used in @code{cpp}.
                    988: 
                    989: @findex OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
                    990: @item OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
                    991: Define this macro if the type of Objective C selectors should be
                    992: @code{int}.
                    993: 
                    994: If this macro is not defined, then selectors should have the type
                    995: @code{struct objc_selector *}.
                    996: 
                    997: @findex OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
                    998: @item OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
                    999: Define this macro if the compiler can group all the selectors together
                   1000: into a vector and use just one label at the beginning of the vector.
                   1001: Otherwise, the compiler must give each selector its own assembler
                   1002: label.
                   1003: 
                   1004: On certain machines, it is important to have a separate label for each
                   1005: selector because this enables the linker to eliminate duplicate selectors.
                   1006: 
                   1007: @findex TARGET_BELL
                   1008: @item TARGET_BELL
                   1009: A C constant expression for the integer value for escape sequence
                   1010: @samp{\a}.
                   1011: 
                   1012: @findex TARGET_TAB
                   1013: @findex TARGET_BS
                   1014: @findex TARGET_NEWLINE
                   1015: @item TARGET_BS
                   1016: @itemx TARGET_TAB
                   1017: @itemx TARGET_NEWLINE
                   1018: C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
                   1019: @samp{\b}, @samp{\t} and @samp{\n}.
                   1020: 
                   1021: @findex TARGET_VT
                   1022: @findex TARGET_FF
                   1023: @findex TARGET_CR
                   1024: @item TARGET_VT
                   1025: @itemx TARGET_FF
                   1026: @itemx TARGET_CR
                   1027: C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
                   1028: @samp{\v}, @samp{\f} and @samp{\r}.
                   1029: @end table
                   1030: 
                   1031: @node Registers
                   1032: @section Register Usage
                   1033: @cindex register usage
                   1034: 
                   1035: This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
                   1036: has, and how (in general) they can be used.
                   1037: 
                   1038: The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
                   1039: done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}.  For information
                   1040: on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
                   1041: For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
                   1042: For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
                   1043: 
                   1044: @menu
                   1045: * Register Basics::            Number and kinds of registers.
                   1046: * Allocation Order::           Order in which registers are allocated.
                   1047: * Values in Registers::                What kinds of values each reg can hold.
                   1048: * Leaf Functions::             Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
                   1049: * Stack Registers::            Handling a register stack such as 80387.
                   1050: * Obsolete Register Macros::   Macros formerly used for the 80387.
                   1051: @end menu
                   1052: 
                   1053: @node Register Basics
                   1054: @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
                   1055: 
                   1056: @table @code
                   1057: @findex FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   1058: @item FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   1059: Number of hardware registers known to the compiler.  They receive
                   1060: numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
                   1061: pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
                   1062: @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
                   1063: 
                   1064: @item FIXED_REGISTERS
                   1065: @findex FIXED_REGISTERS
                   1066: @cindex fixed register
                   1067: An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
                   1068: all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
                   1069: general allocation.  These would include the stack pointer, the frame
                   1070: pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
                   1071: register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
                   1072: machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
                   1073: and any other numbered register with a standard use.
                   1074: 
                   1075: This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
                   1076: commas and surrounded by braces.  The @var{n}th number is 1 if
                   1077: register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
                   1078: 
                   1079: The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
                   1080: the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
                   1081: by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
                   1082: the user with the command options @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
                   1083: @samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
                   1084: 
                   1085: @findex CALL_USED_REGISTERS
                   1086: @item CALL_USED_REGISTERS
                   1087: @cindex call-used register
                   1088: @cindex call-clobbered register
                   1089: @cindex call-saved register
                   1090: Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
                   1091: clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
                   1092: registers.  This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
                   1093: available for general allocation of values that must live across
                   1094: function calls.
                   1095: 
                   1096: If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
                   1097: automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
                   1098: exit, if the register is used within the function.
                   1099: 
                   1100: @findex CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
                   1101: @findex fixed_regs
                   1102: @findex call_used_regs
                   1103: @item CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
                   1104: Zero or more C statements that may conditionally modify two variables
                   1105: @code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} (both of type @code{char
                   1106: []}) after they have been initialized from the two preceding macros.
                   1107: 
                   1108: This is necessary in case the fixed or call-clobbered registers depend
                   1109: on target flags.
                   1110: 
                   1111: You need not define this macro if it has no work to do.
                   1112: 
                   1113: @cindex disabling certain registers
                   1114: @cindex controlling register usage 
                   1115: If the usage of an entire class of registers depends on the target
                   1116: flags, you may indicate this to GCC by using this macro to modify
                   1117: @code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} to 1 for each of the
                   1118: registers in the classes which should not be used by GCC.  Also define
                   1119: the macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} to return @code{NO_REGS} if it
                   1120: is called with a letter for a class that shouldn't be used.
                   1121: 
                   1122: (However, if this class is not included in @code{GENERAL_REGS} and all
                   1123: of the insn patterns whose constraints permit this class are
                   1124: controlled by target switches, then GCC will automatically avoid using
                   1125: these registers when the target switches are opposed to them.)
                   1126: 
                   1127: @findex NON_SAVING_SETJMP
                   1128: @item NON_SAVING_SETJMP
                   1129: If this macro is defined and has a nonzero value, it means that
                   1130: @code{setjmp} and related functions fail to save the registers, or that
                   1131: @code{longjmp} fails to restore them.  To compensate, the compiler
                   1132: avoids putting variables in registers in functions that use
                   1133: @code{setjmp}.
                   1134: 
                   1135: @findex INCOMING_REGNO
                   1136: @item INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
                   1137: Define this macro if the target machine has register windows.  This C
                   1138: expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
                   1139: corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
                   1140: function.  Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
                   1141: outbound register.
                   1142: 
                   1143: @findex OUTGOING_REGNO
                   1144: @item OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
                   1145: Define this macro if the target machine has register windows.  This C
                   1146: expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
                   1147: corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
                   1148: function.  Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
                   1149: register.
                   1150: 
                   1151: @ignore
                   1152: @findex PC_REGNUM
                   1153: @item PC_REGNUM
                   1154: If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
                   1155: register number.  Otherwise, do not define it.
                   1156: @end ignore
                   1157: @end table
                   1158: 
                   1159: @node Allocation Order
                   1160: @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
                   1161: @cindex order of register allocation
                   1162: @cindex register allocation order
                   1163: 
                   1164: @table @code
                   1165: @findex REG_ALLOC_ORDER
                   1166: @item REG_ALLOC_ORDER
                   1167: If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
                   1168: numbers of hard registers in the order in which GNU CC should prefer
                   1169: to use them (from most preferred to least).
                   1170: 
                   1171: If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
                   1172: (all else being equal).
                   1173: 
                   1174: One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
                   1175: registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
                   1176: instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers.  On such
                   1177: machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
                   1178: the highest numbered allocatable register first.
                   1179: 
                   1180: @findex ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
                   1181: @item ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
                   1182: A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
                   1183: hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
                   1184: 
                   1185: Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
                   1186: Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
                   1187: register; and so on.
                   1188: 
                   1189: The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
                   1190: @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
                   1191: 
                   1192: On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
                   1193: @end table
                   1194: 
                   1195: @node Values in Registers
                   1196: @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
                   1197: 
                   1198: This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
                   1199: (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
                   1200: consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
                   1201: 
                   1202: @table @code
                   1203: @findex HARD_REGNO_NREGS
                   1204: @item HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
                   1205: A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
                   1206: at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
                   1207: @var{mode}.
                   1208: 
                   1209: On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
                   1210: definition of this macro is
                   1211: 
                   1212: @smallexample
                   1213: #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE)            \
                   1214:    ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)  \
                   1215:     / UNITS_PER_WORD))
                   1216: @end smallexample
                   1217: 
                   1218: @findex HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
                   1219: @item HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
                   1220: A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
                   1221: of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
                   1222: registers starting with that one).  For a machine where all registers
                   1223: are equivalent, a suitable definition is
                   1224: 
                   1225: @smallexample
                   1226: #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
                   1227: @end smallexample
                   1228: 
                   1229: It is not necessary for this macro to check for the numbers of fixed
                   1230: registers, because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always
                   1231: occupied.
                   1232: 
                   1233: @cindex register pairs
                   1234: On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
                   1235: register pairs.  The way to implement that is to define this macro
                   1236: to reject odd register numbers for such modes.
                   1237: 
                   1238: @ignore
                   1239: @c I think this is not true now
                   1240: GNU CC assumes that it can always move values between registers and
                   1241: (suitably addressed) memory locations.  If it is impossible to move a
                   1242: value of a certain mode between memory and certain registers, then
                   1243: @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} must not allow this mode in those registers.
                   1244: @end ignore
                   1245: 
                   1246: The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
                   1247: @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
                   1248: register and any other hard register for which the mode is OK; and that
                   1249: moving a value into the register and back out not alter it.
                   1250: 
                   1251: Since the same instruction used to move @code{SImode} will work for all
                   1252: narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
                   1253: @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
                   1254: you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this.  This
                   1255: is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
                   1256: and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
                   1257: to be tieable.
                   1258: 
                   1259: Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
                   1260: Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
                   1261: in floating point registers.  This is not true.  Any registers that
                   1262: can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
                   1263: mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
                   1264: registers.  Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
                   1265: 
                   1266: On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
                   1267: modes may not go in floating registers.  This is true if the floating
                   1268: registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
                   1269: non-floating value there would garble it.  In this case,
                   1270: @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
                   1271: floating registers.  But if the floating registers do not automatically
                   1272: normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
                   1273: unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
                   1274: register, so you can define this macro to say so.
                   1275: 
                   1276: On some machines, such as the Sparc and the Mips, we get better code
                   1277: by defining @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to forbid integers in floating
                   1278: registers, even though the hardware is capable of handling them.  This
                   1279: is because transferring values between floating registers and general
                   1280: registers is so slow that it is better to keep the integer in memory.
                   1281: 
                   1282: The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
                   1283: they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
                   1284: instructions.  However, this is of no concern to
                   1285: @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.  You handle it by writing the proper
                   1286: constraints for those instructions.
                   1287: 
                   1288: On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
                   1289: so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
                   1290: register if floating point arithmetic is not being done.  As long as the
                   1291: floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
                   1292: be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
                   1293: 
                   1294: @findex MODES_TIEABLE_P
                   1295: @item MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
                   1296: A C expression that is nonzero if it is desirable to choose register
                   1297: allocation so as to avoid move instructions between a value of mode
                   1298: @var{mode1} and a value of mode @var{mode2}.
                   1299: 
                   1300: If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
                   1301: @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are ever different
                   1302: for any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1},
                   1303: @var{mode2})} must be zero.
                   1304: @end table
                   1305: 
                   1306: @node Leaf Functions
                   1307: @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
                   1308: 
                   1309: @cindex leaf functions
                   1310: @cindex functions, leaf
                   1311: On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
                   1312: more efficiently if it does not make its own register window.  Often this
                   1313: means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
                   1314: are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
                   1315: normally arrive.
                   1316: 
                   1317: The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
                   1318: other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
                   1319: registers for its own variables and temporaries.  We use the term ``leaf
                   1320: function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
                   1321: handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
                   1322: functions''.
                   1323: 
                   1324: GNU CC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
                   1325: suitable for leaf function treatment.  So it needs to renumber the
                   1326: registers in order to output a leaf function.  The following macros
                   1327: accomplish this.
                   1328: 
                   1329: @table @code
                   1330: @findex LEAF_REGISTERS
                   1331: @item LEAF_REGISTERS
                   1332: A C initializer for a vector, indexed by hard register number, which
                   1333: contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
                   1334: function treatment.
                   1335: 
                   1336: If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
                   1337: registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
                   1338: GNU CC would ordinarily allocate.  The registers which will actually be
                   1339: used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
                   1340: in this vector.
                   1341: 
                   1342: Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
                   1343: the treatment of leaf functions.
                   1344: 
                   1345: @findex LEAF_REG_REMAP
                   1346: @item LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
                   1347: A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
                   1348: should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
                   1349: 
                   1350: If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
                   1351: function before renumbering, then the expression should yield -1, which
                   1352: will cause the compiler to abort.
                   1353: 
                   1354: Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
                   1355: treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
                   1356: this.
                   1357: 
                   1358: @findex REG_LEAF_ALLOC_ORDER
                   1359: @item REG_LEAF_ALLOC_ORDER
                   1360: If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
                   1361: numbers of hard registers in the order in which the GNU CC should prefer
                   1362: to use them (from most preferred to least) in a leaf function.  If this
                   1363: macro is not defined, REG_ALLOC_ORDER is used for both non-leaf and
                   1364: leaf-functions.
                   1365: @c *important*.. is the above all-caps phrase supposed tobe in code
                   1366: @c font? --mew 2feb93
                   1367: @end table
                   1368: 
                   1369: @findex leaf_function
                   1370: Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
                   1371: treat leaf functions specially.  It can test the C variable
                   1372: @code{leaf_function} which is nonzero for leaf functions.  (The variable
                   1373: @code{leaf_function} is defined only if @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is
                   1374: defined.)
                   1375: @c changed this to fix overfull.  ALSO:  why the "it" at the beginning
                   1376: @c of the next paragraph?!  --mew 2feb93 
                   1377: 
                   1378: @node Stack Registers
                   1379: @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
                   1380: 
                   1381: There are special features to handle computers where some of the
                   1382: ``registers'' form a stack, as in the 80387 coprocessor for the 80386.
                   1383: Stack registers are normally written by pushing onto the stack, and are
                   1384: numbered relative to the top of the stack.
                   1385: 
                   1386: Currently, GNU CC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
                   1387: they must be consecutively numbered.
                   1388: 
                   1389: @table @code
                   1390: @findex STACK_REGS
                   1391: @item STACK_REGS
                   1392: Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
                   1393: 
                   1394: @findex FIRST_STACK_REG
                   1395: @item FIRST_STACK_REG
                   1396: The number of the first stack-like register.  This one is the top
                   1397: of the stack.
                   1398: 
                   1399: @findex LAST_STACK_REG
                   1400: @item LAST_STACK_REG
                   1401: The number of the last stack-like register.  This one is the bottom of
                   1402: the stack.
                   1403: @end table
                   1404: 
                   1405: @node Obsolete Register Macros
                   1406: @subsection Obsolete Macros for Controlling Register Usage
                   1407: 
                   1408: These features do not work very well.  They exist because they used to
                   1409: be required to generate correct code for the 80387 coprocessor of the
                   1410: 80386.  They are no longer used by that machine description and may be
                   1411: removed in a later version of the compiler.  Don't use them!
                   1412: 
                   1413: @table @code
                   1414: @findex OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P 
                   1415: @item OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
                   1416: If defined, this is a C expression whose value is nonzero if hard
                   1417: register number @var{regno} is an overlapping register.  This means a
                   1418: hard register which overlaps a hard register with a different number.
                   1419: (Such overlap is undesirable, but occasionally it allows a machine to
                   1420: be supported which otherwise could not be.)  This macro must return
                   1421: nonzero for @emph{all} the registers which overlap each other.  GNU CC
                   1422: can use an overlapping register only in certain limited ways.  It can
                   1423: be used for allocation within a basic block, and may be spilled for
                   1424: reloading; that is all.
                   1425: 
                   1426: If this macro is not defined, it means that none of the hard registers
                   1427: overlap each other.  This is the usual situation.
                   1428: 
                   1429: @findex INSN_CLOBBERS_REGNO_P
                   1430: @item INSN_CLOBBERS_REGNO_P (@var{insn}, @var{regno})
                   1431: If defined, this is a C expression whose value should be nonzero if
                   1432: the insn @var{insn} has the effect of mysteriously clobbering the
                   1433: contents of hard register number @var{regno}.  By ``mysterious'' we
                   1434: mean that the insn's RTL expression doesn't describe such an effect.
                   1435: 
                   1436: If this macro is not defined, it means that no insn clobbers registers
                   1437: mysteriously.  This is the usual situation; all else being equal,
                   1438: it is best for the RTL expression to show all the activity.
                   1439: 
                   1440: @cindex death notes
                   1441: @findex PRESERVE_DEATH_INFO_REGNO_P
                   1442: @item PRESERVE_DEATH_INFO_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
                   1443: If defined, this is a C expression whose value is nonzero if accurate
                   1444: @code{REG_DEAD} notes are needed for hard register number @var{regno}
                   1445: at the time of outputting the assembler code.  When this is so, a few
                   1446: optimizations that take place after register allocation and could
                   1447: invalidate the death notes are not done when this register is
                   1448: involved.
                   1449: 
                   1450: You would arrange to preserve death info for a register when some of the
                   1451: code in the machine description which is executed to write the assembler
                   1452: code looks at the death notes.  This is necessary only when the actual
                   1453: hardware feature which GNU CC thinks of as a register is not actually a
                   1454: register of the usual sort.  (It might, for example, be a hardware
                   1455: stack.)
                   1456: 
                   1457: If this macro is not defined, it means that no death notes need to be
                   1458: preserved.  This is the usual situation.
                   1459: @end table
                   1460: 
                   1461: @node Register Classes
                   1462: @section Register Classes
                   1463: @cindex register class definitions
                   1464: @cindex class definitions, register
                   1465: 
                   1466: On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
                   1467: For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
                   1468: certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions.  These machine
                   1469: restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
                   1470: 
                   1471: You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
                   1472: which of the registers belong to it.  Then you can specify register classes
                   1473: that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
                   1474: 
                   1475: @findex ALL_REGS
                   1476: @findex NO_REGS
                   1477: In general, each register will belong to several classes.  In fact, one
                   1478: class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers.  Another
                   1479: class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers.  Often the
                   1480: union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
                   1481: 
                   1482: @findex GENERAL_REGS
                   1483: One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}.  There is nothing
                   1484: terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
                   1485: @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class.  If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
                   1486: the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
                   1487: to @code{ALL_REGS}.
                   1488: 
                   1489: Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
                   1490: then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
                   1491: 
                   1492: The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
                   1493: constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
                   1494: You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
                   1495: them in operand constraints.
                   1496: 
                   1497: You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
                   1498: instruction allows both classes.  For example, if an instruction allows
                   1499: either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
                   1500: certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
                   1501: which includes both of them.  Otherwise you will get suboptimal code.
                   1502: 
                   1503: You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
                   1504: classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
                   1505: contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
                   1506: in their union.
                   1507: 
                   1508: When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
                   1509: certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
                   1510: Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
                   1511: a register pair to start with an even-numbered register.  The way to
                   1512: specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
                   1513: 
                   1514: Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
                   1515: instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
                   1516: each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
                   1517: mode to or from memory.  For example, on some machines, the operations for
                   1518: single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers.  When
                   1519: this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
                   1520: instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
                   1521: single-byte values can be loaded or stored.  This is so that
                   1522: @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
                   1523: 
                   1524: @table @code
                   1525: @findex enum reg_class
                   1526: @item enum reg_class
                   1527: An enumeral type that must be defined with all the register class names
                   1528: as enumeral values.  @code{NO_REGS} must be first.  @code{ALL_REGS}
                   1529: must be the last register class, followed by one more enumeral value,
                   1530: @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
                   1531: tells how many classes there are.
                   1532: 
                   1533: Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
                   1534: the class name to type @code{int}.  The number serves as an index
                   1535: in many of the tables described below.
                   1536: 
                   1537: @findex N_REG_CLASSES
                   1538: @item N_REG_CLASSES
                   1539: The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
                   1540: 
                   1541: @example
                   1542: #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
                   1543: @end example
                   1544: 
                   1545: @findex REG_CLASS_NAMES
                   1546: @item REG_CLASS_NAMES
                   1547: An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
                   1548: constants.  These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
                   1549: 
                   1550: @findex REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
                   1551: @item REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
                   1552: An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
                   1553: which are bit masks.  The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
                   1554: @var{n}.  The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
                   1555: register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
                   1556: 
                   1557: When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
                   1558: Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
                   1559: several integers.  Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
                   1560: for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
                   1561: 
                   1562: @findex REGNO_REG_CLASS 
                   1563: @item REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
                   1564: A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
                   1565: @var{regno}.  In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
                   1566: which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
                   1567: register.
                   1568: 
                   1569: @findex BASE_REG_CLASS
                   1570: @item BASE_REG_CLASS
                   1571: A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
                   1572: base register must belong.  A base register is one used in an address
                   1573: which is the register value plus a displacement.
                   1574: 
                   1575: @findex INDEX_REG_CLASS
                   1576: @item INDEX_REG_CLASS
                   1577: A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
                   1578: index register must belong.  An index register is one used in an
                   1579: address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
                   1580: added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
                   1581: 
                   1582: @findex REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER
                   1583: @item REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER (@var{char})
                   1584: A C expression which defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
                   1585: letters for register classes.  If @var{char} is such a letter, the
                   1586: value should be the register class corresponding to it.  Otherwise,
                   1587: the value should be @code{NO_REGS}.  The register letter @samp{r},
                   1588: corresponding to class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, will not be passed
                   1589: to this macro; you do not need to handle it.
                   1590: 
                   1591: @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P
                   1592: @item REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
                   1593: A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
                   1594: suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.  It may be
                   1595: either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
                   1596: allocated such a hard register.
                   1597: 
                   1598: @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
                   1599: @item REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
                   1600: A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
                   1601: suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses.  It may be
                   1602: either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
                   1603: allocated such a hard register.
                   1604: 
                   1605: The difference between an index register and a base register is that
                   1606: the index register may be scaled.  If an address involves the sum of
                   1607: two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
                   1608: labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
                   1609: labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
                   1610: may serve in each capacity.  The compiler will try both labelings,
                   1611: looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
                   1612: only if neither labeling works.
                   1613: 
                   1614: @findex PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
                   1615: @item PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
                   1616: A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
                   1617: to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
                   1618: @var{class}.  The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
                   1619: another, smaller class.  On many machines, the following definition is
                   1620: safe: 
                   1621: 
                   1622: @example
                   1623: #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
                   1624: @end example
                   1625: 
                   1626: Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code.  For
                   1627: example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
                   1628: for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
                   1629: @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
                   1630: Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
                   1631: 
                   1632: If @var{x} is a @code{const_double}, by returning @code{NO_REGS}
                   1633: you can force @var{x} into a memory constant.  This is useful on
                   1634: certain machines where immediate floating values cannot be loaded into
                   1635: certain kinds of registers.
                   1636: 
                   1637: @findex PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
                   1638: @item PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
                   1639: Like @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, but for output reloads instead of
                   1640: input reloads.  If you don't define this macro, the default is to use
                   1641: @var{class}, unchanged.
                   1642: 
                   1643: @findex LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS
                   1644: @item LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
                   1645: A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
                   1646: to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
                   1647: @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
                   1648: ordinarily be used.
                   1649: 
                   1650: Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
                   1651: there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
                   1652: 
                   1653: The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
                   1654: smaller class.
                   1655: 
                   1656: Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
                   1657: require the macro to do something nontrivial.
                   1658: 
                   1659: @findex SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS
                   1660: @findex SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
                   1661: @findex SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
                   1662: @item SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
                   1663: @itemx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
                   1664: @itemx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
                   1665: Many machines have some registers that cannot be copied directly to or
                   1666: from memory or even from other types of registers.  An example is the
                   1667: @samp{MQ} register, which on most machines, can only be copied to or
                   1668: from general registers, but not memory.  Some machines allow copying all
                   1669: registers to and from memory, but require a scratch register for stores
                   1670: to some memory locations (e.g., those with symbolic address on the RT,
                   1671: and those with certain symbolic address on the Sparc when compiling
                   1672: PIC).  In some cases, both an intermediate and a scratch register are
                   1673: required.
                   1674: 
                   1675: You should define these macros to indicate to the reload phase that it may
                   1676: need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
                   1677: register to contain the data.  Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
                   1678: register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
                   1679: you should define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
                   1680: largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
                   1681: intermediate registers or scratch registers.
                   1682: 
                   1683: If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
                   1684: intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
                   1685: should be defined to return the largest register class required.  If the
                   1686: requirements for input and output reloads are the same, the macro
                   1687: @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should be used instead of defining both
                   1688: macros identically.
                   1689: 
                   1690: The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
                   1691: Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
                   1692: can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
                   1693: @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register.  Do not define this
                   1694: macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
                   1695: 
                   1696: If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
                   1697: intermediate register), you should define patterns for
                   1698: @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
                   1699: (@pxref{Standard Names}.  These patterns, which will normally be
                   1700: implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
                   1701: @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
                   1702: register. 
                   1703: 
                   1704: Define constraints for the reload register and scratch register that
                   1705: contain a single register class.  If the original reload register (whose
                   1706: class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
                   1707: value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
                   1708: register.  Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
                   1709: Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
                   1710: 
                   1711: @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
                   1712: pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
                   1713: Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return -1 if the pseudo is
                   1714: in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
                   1715: 
                   1716: These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
                   1717: registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
                   1718: registers.  In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
                   1719: would not be helpful.  Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
                   1720: the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as a
                   1721: intermediate storage.  This case often occurs between floating-point and
                   1722: general registers.
                   1723: 
                   1724: @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
                   1725: @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
                   1726: Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
                   1727: to some other registers without using memory.  Define this macro on
                   1728: those machines to be a C expression that is non-zero if objects of mode
                   1729: @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
                   1730: class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
                   1731: and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
                   1732: 
                   1733: Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero. 
                   1734: 
                   1735: @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX
                   1736: @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
                   1737: Normally, when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
                   1738: will allocate a stack slot when a memory location for a register copy
                   1739: is needed.  If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the
                   1740: memory location defined by this macro.
                   1741: 
                   1742: @findex SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
                   1743: @item SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
                   1744: Normally the compiler will avoid choosing spill registers from registers
                   1745: that have been explicitly mentioned in the rtl (these registers are
                   1746: normally those used to pass parameters and return values).  However,
                   1747: some machines have so few registers of certain classes that there would
                   1748: not be enough registers to use as spill registers if this were done.
                   1749: 
                   1750: You should define @code{SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES} on those machines.  When
                   1751: it is defined, the compiler allows registers explicitly used in the rtl
                   1752: to be used as spill registers but prevents the compiler from extending
                   1753: the lifetime of these registers.
                   1754: 
                   1755: Defining this macro is always safe, but unnecessarily defining this macro
                   1756: will reduce the amount of optimizations that can be performed in some
                   1757: cases.  If this macro is not defined but needs to be, the compiler will
                   1758: run out of reload registers and print a fatal error message.
                   1759: 
                   1760: For most machines, this macro should not be defined.
                   1761: 
                   1762: @findex CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
                   1763: @item CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P (@var{class})
                   1764: A C expression whose value is nonzero if pseudos that have been assigned
                   1765: to registers of class @var{class} would likely be spilled because
                   1766: registers of @var{class} are needed for spill registers.
                   1767: 
                   1768: The default value of this macro returns 1 if @var{class} has exactly one
                   1769: register and zero otherwise.  On most machines, this default should be
                   1770: used.  Only define this macro to some other expression if pseudo
                   1771: allocated by @file{local-alloc.c} end up in memory because their hard
                   1772: registers were needed for spill regisers.  If this macro returns nonzero
                   1773: for those classes, those pseudos will only be allocated by
                   1774: @file{global.c}, which knows how to reallocate the pseudo to another
                   1775: register.  If there would not be another register available for
                   1776: reallocation, you should not change the definition of this macro since
                   1777: the only effect of such a definition would be to slow down register
                   1778: allocation.
                   1779: 
                   1780: @findex CLASS_MAX_NREGS
                   1781: @item CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
                   1782: A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
                   1783: of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
                   1784: 
                   1785: This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}.
                   1786: In fact, the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
                   1787: should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})}
                   1788: for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
                   1789: 
                   1790: This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
                   1791: in the reload pass.
                   1792: @end table
                   1793: 
                   1794: Three other special macros describe which operands fit which constraint
                   1795: letters.
                   1796: 
                   1797: @table @code
                   1798: @findex CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
                   1799: @item CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
                   1800: A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint letters
                   1801: that specify particular ranges of integer values.  If @var{c} is one
                   1802: of those letters, the expression should check that @var{value}, an integer,
                   1803: is in the appropriate range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise.  If @var{c} is
                   1804: not one of those letters, the value should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
                   1805: 
                   1806: @findex CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
                   1807: @item CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
                   1808: A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
                   1809: letters that specify particular ranges of @code{const_double} values.
                   1810: 
                   1811: If @var{c} is one of those letters, the expression should check that
                   1812: @var{value}, an RTX of code @code{const_double}, is in the appropriate
                   1813: range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise.  If @var{c} is not one of those
                   1814: letters, the value should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
                   1815: 
                   1816: @code{const_double} is used for all floating-point constants and for
                   1817: @code{DImode} fixed-point constants.  A given letter can accept either
                   1818: or both kinds of values.  It can use @code{GET_MODE} to distinguish
                   1819: between these kinds.
                   1820: 
                   1821: @findex EXTRA_CONSTRAINT
                   1822: @item EXTRA_CONSTRAINT (@var{value}, @var{c})
                   1823: A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
                   1824: letters that can be used to segregate specific types of operands,
                   1825: usually memory references, for the target machine.  Normally this macro
                   1826: will not be defined.  If it is required for a particular target machine,
                   1827: it should return 1 if @var{value} corresponds to the operand type
                   1828: represented by the constraint letter @var{c}.  If @var{c} is not defined
                   1829: as an extra constraint, the value returned should be 0 regardless of
                   1830: @var{value}.
                   1831: 
                   1832: For example, on the ROMP, load instructions cannot have their output in r0 if
                   1833: the memory reference contains a symbolic address.  Constraint letter
                   1834: @samp{Q} is defined as representing a memory address that does
                   1835: @emph{not} contain a symbolic address.  An alternative is specified with
                   1836: a @samp{Q} constraint on the input and @samp{r} on the output.  The next
                   1837: alternative specifies @samp{m} on the input and a register class that
                   1838: does not include r0 on the output.
                   1839: @end table
                   1840: 
                   1841: @node Stack and Calling
                   1842: @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
                   1843: @cindex calling conventions
                   1844: 
                   1845: @menu
                   1846: * Frame Layout::
                   1847: * Frame Registers::
                   1848: * Elimination::                        
                   1849: * Stack Arguments::
                   1850: * Register Arguments::
                   1851: * Scalar Return::
                   1852: * Aggregate Return::
                   1853: * Caller Saves::
                   1854: * Function Entry::
                   1855: * Profiling::
                   1856: @end menu
                   1857: 
                   1858: @node Frame Layout
                   1859: @subsection Basic Stack Layout
                   1860: @cindex stack frame layout
                   1861: @cindex frame layout
                   1862: 
                   1863: @table @code
                   1864: @findex STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                   1865: @item STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                   1866: Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
                   1867: pointer to a smaller address.
                   1868: 
                   1869: When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{},'' it means that the
                   1870: compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
                   1871: definition used does not matter.
                   1872: 
                   1873: @findex FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                   1874: @item FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                   1875: Define this macro if the addresses of local variable slots are at negative
                   1876: offsets from the frame pointer.
                   1877: 
                   1878: @findex ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
                   1879: @item ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
                   1880: Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
                   1881: addresses on the stack.
                   1882: 
                   1883: @findex STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
                   1884: @item STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
                   1885: Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
                   1886: 
                   1887: If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
                   1888: subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
                   1889: Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
                   1890: value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
                   1891: @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
                   1892: @c rid of an overfull.  --mew 2feb93
                   1893: 
                   1894: @findex STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
                   1895: @item STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
                   1896: Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
                   1897: outgoing arguments are placed.  If not specified, the default value of
                   1898: zero is used.  This is the proper value for most machines.
                   1899: 
                   1900: If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
                   1901: the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
                   1902: 
                   1903: @findex FIRST_PARM_OFFSET
                   1904: @item FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
                   1905: Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
                   1906: address.  On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
                   1907: function. 
                   1908: 
                   1909: If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
                   1910: the first argument's address.
                   1911: 
                   1912: @findex STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET
                   1913: @item STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
                   1914: Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
                   1915: on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
                   1916: 
                   1917: The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
                   1918: length of the outgoing arguments.  The default is correct for most
                   1919: machines.  See @file{function.c} for details.
                   1920: 
                   1921: @findex DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS
                   1922: @item DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
                   1923: A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
                   1924: frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored.  Assume that
                   1925: @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
                   1926: itself.
                   1927: 
                   1928: If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
                   1929: of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
                   1930: address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
                   1931: 
                   1932: @findex SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
                   1933: @item SERTUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES ()
                   1934: If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
                   1935: setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed.  For example,
                   1936: on the Sparc, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
                   1937: before we can access arbitrary stack frames.
                   1938: This macro will seldom need to be defined.
                   1939: 
                   1940: @findex RETURN_ADDR_RTX
                   1941: @item RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
                   1942: A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
                   1943: address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame.
                   1944: @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count} frame, or
                   1945: the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
                   1946: @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
                   1947: 
                   1948: @findex RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
                   1949: @item RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
                   1950: Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
                   1951: from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
                   1952: @end table
                   1953: 
                   1954: @need 2000
                   1955: @node Frame Registers
                   1956: @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame 
                   1957: 
                   1958: @table @code
                   1959: @findex STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1960: @item STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1961: The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
                   1962: fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}.  On most machines,
                   1963: the hardware determines which register this is.
                   1964: 
                   1965: @findex FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1966: @item FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1967: The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
                   1968: access automatic variables in the stack frame.  On some machines, the
                   1969: hardware determines which register this is.  On other machines, you can
                   1970: choose any register you wish for this purpose.
                   1971: 
                   1972: @findex HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1973: @item HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1974: On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
                   1975: offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
                   1976: allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
                   1977: between these two locations).  On those machines,
                   1978: @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} as a special, fixed register to be used
                   1979: internally until the offset is known, and define
                   1980: @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the hard register used for the
                   1981: frame pointer.
                   1982: 
                   1983: You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
                   1984: is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
                   1985: the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
                   1986: completed.  When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
                   1987: definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
                   1988: @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
                   1989: or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
                   1990: 
                   1991: Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
                   1992: @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
                   1993: 
                   1994: @findex ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1995: @item ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1996: The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
                   1997: the function's argument list.  On some machines, this is the same as the
                   1998: frame pointer register.  On some machines, the hardware determines which
                   1999: register this is.  On other machines, you can choose any register you
                   2000: wish for this purpose.  If this is not the same register as the frame
                   2001: pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
                   2002: @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
                   2003: (@pxref{Elimination}).
                   2004: 
                   2005: @findex STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
                   2006: @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
                   2007: @item STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
                   2008: @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
                   2009: Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer.  If
                   2010: register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
                   2011: function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
                   2012: number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}.  If
                   2013: these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
                   2014: not be defined.@refill
                   2015: 
                   2016: The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
                   2017: 
                   2018: If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
                   2019: defined; instead, the next two macros should be defined.
                   2020: 
                   2021: @findex STATIC_CHAIN
                   2022: @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
                   2023: @item STATIC_CHAIN
                   2024: @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
                   2025: If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros provide rtx giving
                   2026: @code{mem} expressions that denote where they are stored.
                   2027: @code{STATIC_CHAIN} and @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING} give the locations
                   2028: as seen by the calling and called functions, respectively.  Often the former
                   2029: will be at an offset from the stack pointer and the latter at an offset from
                   2030: the frame pointer.@refill
                   2031: 
                   2032: @findex stack_pointer_rtx
                   2033: @findex frame_pointer_rtx
                   2034: @findex arg_pointer_rtx
                   2035: The variables @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, @code{frame_pointer_rtx}, and
                   2036: @code{arg_pointer_rtx} will have been initialized prior to the use of these
                   2037: macros and should be used to refer to those items.
                   2038: 
                   2039: If the static chain is passed in a register, the two previous macros should
                   2040: be defined instead.
                   2041: @end table
                   2042: 
                   2043: @node Elimination
                   2044: @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
                   2045: 
                   2046: @table @code
                   2047: @findex FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
                   2048: @item FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
                   2049: A C expression which is nonzero if a function must have and use a frame
                   2050: pointer.  This expression is evaluated  in the reload pass.  If its value is
                   2051: nonzero the function will have a frame pointer.
                   2052: 
                   2053: The expression can in principle examine the current function and decide
                   2054: according to the facts, but on most machines the constant 0 or the
                   2055: constant 1 suffices.  Use 0 when the machine allows code to be generated
                   2056: with no frame pointer, and doing so saves some time or space.  Use 1
                   2057: when there is no possible advantage to avoiding a frame pointer.
                   2058: 
                   2059: In certain cases, the compiler does not know how to produce valid code
                   2060: without a frame pointer.  The compiler recognizes those cases and
                   2061: automatically gives the function a frame pointer regardless of what
                   2062: @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} says.  You don't need to worry about
                   2063: them.@refill
                   2064: 
                   2065: In a function that does not require a frame pointer, the frame pointer
                   2066: register can be allocated for ordinary usage, unless you mark it as a
                   2067: fixed register.  See @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} for more information.
                   2068: 
                   2069: This macro is ignored and you do not need to define it if the function
                   2070: @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined.
                   2071: 
                   2072: @findex INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET
                   2073: @findex get_frame_size
                   2074: @item INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
                   2075: A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
                   2076: between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
                   2077: the function prologue.  The value would be computed from information
                   2078: such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
                   2079: registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
                   2080: 
                   2081: If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
                   2082: need not be defined.  Otherwise, it must be defined even if
                   2083: @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} is defined to always be true; in that
                   2084: case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
                   2085: 
                   2086: @findex ELIMINABLE_REGS
                   2087: @item ELIMINABLE_REGS
                   2088: If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
                   2089: eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame.  If it is not
                   2090: defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
                   2091: references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
                   2092: 
                   2093: The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
                   2094: of which specifies an original and replacement register.
                   2095: 
                   2096: On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
                   2097: the compilation is completed.  In such a case, a separate hard register
                   2098: must be used for the argument pointer.  This register can be eliminated by
                   2099: replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
                   2100: depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
                   2101: 
                   2102: In this case, you might specify:
                   2103: @example
                   2104: #define ELIMINABLE_REGS  \
                   2105: @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
                   2106:  @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
                   2107:  @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
                   2108: @end example
                   2109: 
                   2110: Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
                   2111: specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
                   2112: 
                   2113: @findex CAN_ELIMINATE
                   2114: @item CAN_ELIMINATE (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg})
                   2115: A C expression that returns non-zero if the compiler is allowed to try
                   2116: to replace register number @var{from-reg} with register number
                   2117: @var{to-reg}.  This macro need only be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS}
                   2118: is defined, and will usually be the constant 1, since most of the cases
                   2119: preventing register elimination are things that the compiler already
                   2120: knows about.
                   2121: 
                   2122: @findex INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET
                   2123: @item INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
                   2124: This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}.  It
                   2125: specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
                   2126: registers.  This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
                   2127: defined.
                   2128: 
                   2129: @findex LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
                   2130: @item LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
                   2131: Define this macro if the @code{longjmp} function restores registers from
                   2132: the stack frames, rather than from those saved specifically by
                   2133: @code{setjmp}.  Certain quantities must not be kept in registers across
                   2134: a call to @code{setjmp} on such machines.
                   2135: @end table
                   2136: 
                   2137: @node Stack Arguments
                   2138: @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
                   2139: @cindex arguments on stack
                   2140: @cindex stack arguments
                   2141: 
                   2142: The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
                   2143: on the stack.  See the following section for other macros that
                   2144: control passing certain arguments in registers.
                   2145: 
                   2146: @table @code
                   2147: @findex PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
                   2148: @item PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
                   2149: Define this macro if an argument declared in a prototype as an
                   2150: integral type smaller than @code{int} should actually be passed as an
                   2151: @code{int}.  In addition to avoiding errors in certain cases of
                   2152: mismatch, it also makes for better code on certain machines.
                   2153: 
                   2154: @findex PUSH_ROUNDING
                   2155: @item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
                   2156: A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
                   2157: stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
                   2158: 
                   2159: If the target machine does not have a push instruction, do not define
                   2160: this macro.  That directs GNU CC to use an alternate strategy: to
                   2161: allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
                   2162: it.
                   2163: 
                   2164: On some machines, the definition
                   2165: 
                   2166: @example
                   2167: #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
                   2168: @end example
                   2169: 
                   2170: @noindent
                   2171: will suffice.  But on other machines, instructions that appear
                   2172: to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
                   2173: alignment.  Then the definition should be
                   2174: 
                   2175: @example
                   2176: #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
                   2177: @end example
                   2178: 
                   2179: @findex ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
                   2180: @findex current_function_outgoing_args_size
                   2181: @item ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
                   2182: If defined, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
                   2183: will be computed and placed into the variable
                   2184: @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.  No space will be pushed
                   2185: onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
                   2186: increase the stack frame size by this amount.
                   2187: 
                   2188: Defining both @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
                   2189: is not proper.
                   2190: 
                   2191: @findex REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   2192: @item REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
                   2193: Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
                   2194: allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
                   2195: registers.
                   2196: 
                   2197: The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
                   2198: arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl}.
                   2199: 
                   2200: This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
                   2201: machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
                   2202: which.
                   2203: @c above is overfull.  not sure what to do.  --mew 5feb93  did
                   2204: @c something, not sure if it looks good.  --mew 10feb93
                   2205: 
                   2206: @findex MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   2207: @findex FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   2208: @item MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   2209: @itemx FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{const_size}, @var{var_size})
                   2210: Define these macros in addition to the one above if functions might
                   2211: allocate stack space for arguments even when their values are passed
                   2212: in registers.  These should be used when the stack space allocated
                   2213: for arguments in registers is not a simple constant independent of the
                   2214: function declaration.
                   2215: 
                   2216: The value of the first macro is the size, in bytes, of the area that
                   2217: we should initially assume would be reserved for arguments passed in registers.
                   2218: 
                   2219: The value of the second macro is the actual size, in bytes, of the area
                   2220: that will be reserved for arguments passed in registers.  This takes two
                   2221: arguments: an integer representing the number of bytes of fixed sized
                   2222: arguments on the stack, and a tree representing the number of bytes of
                   2223: variable sized arguments on the stack.
                   2224: 
                   2225: When these macros are defined, @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} will only be
                   2226: called for libcall functions, the current function, or for a function
                   2227: being called when it is known that such stack space must be allocated.
                   2228: In each case this value can be easily computed.
                   2229: 
                   2230: When deciding whether a called function needs such stack space, and how
                   2231: much space to reserve, GNU CC uses these two macros instead of
                   2232: @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}.
                   2233: 
                   2234: @findex OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   2235: @item OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   2236: Define this if it is the responsibility of the caller to allocate the area
                   2237: reserved for arguments passed in registers.
                   2238: 
                   2239: If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
                   2240: whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
                   2241: @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.
                   2242: 
                   2243: @findex STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
                   2244: @item STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
                   2245: Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
                   2246: stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
                   2247: @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
                   2248: @c overfull.. not as specific, tho.  --mew 5feb93
                   2249: 
                   2250: Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
                   2251: stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area.  Defining this macro
                   2252: suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
                   2253: stack in its natural location.
                   2254: 
                   2255: @findex RETURN_POPS_ARGS
                   2256: @item RETURN_POPS_ARGS (@var{funtype}, @var{stack-size})
                   2257: A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes of its own
                   2258: arguments that a function pops on returning, or 0 if the
                   2259: function pops no arguments and the caller must therefore pop them all
                   2260: after the function returns.
                   2261: 
                   2262: @var{funtype} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that
                   2263: describes the function in question.  Normally it is a node of type
                   2264: @code{FUNCTION_TYPE} that describes the data type of the function.
                   2265: From this it is possible to obtain the data types of the value and
                   2266: arguments (if known).
                   2267: 
                   2268: When a call to a library function is being considered, @var{funtype}
                   2269: will contain an identifier node for the library function.  Thus, if
                   2270: you need to distinguish among various library functions, you can do so
                   2271: by their names.  Note that ``library function'' in this context means
                   2272: a function used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known specially
                   2273: in the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being compiled.
                   2274: 
                   2275: @var{stack-size} is the number of bytes of arguments passed on the
                   2276: stack.  If a variable number of bytes is passed, it is zero, and
                   2277: argument popping will always be the responsibility of the calling function.
                   2278: 
                   2279: On the Vax, all functions always pop their arguments, so the definition
                   2280: of this macro is @var{stack-size}.  On the 68000, using the standard
                   2281: calling convention, no functions pop their arguments, so the value of
                   2282: the macro is always 0 in this case.  But an alternative calling
                   2283: convention is available in which functions that take a fixed number of
                   2284: arguments pop them but other functions (such as @code{printf}) pop
                   2285: nothing (the caller pops all).  When this convention is in use,
                   2286: @var{funtype} is examined to determine whether a function takes a fixed
                   2287: number of arguments.
                   2288: @end table
                   2289: 
                   2290: @node Register Arguments
                   2291: @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
                   2292: @cindex arguments in registers
                   2293: @cindex registers arguments
                   2294: 
                   2295: This section describes the macros which let you control how various
                   2296: types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
                   2297: the stack.
                   2298: 
                   2299: @table @code
                   2300: @findex FUNCTION_ARG
                   2301: @item FUNCTION_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
                   2302: A C expression that controls whether a function argument is passed
                   2303: in a register, and which register.
                   2304: 
                   2305: The arguments are @var{cum}, which summarizes all the previous
                   2306: arguments; @var{mode}, the machine mode of the argument; @var{type},
                   2307: the data type of the argument as a tree node or 0 if that is not known
                   2308: (which happens for C support library functions); and @var{named},
                   2309: which is 1 for an ordinary argument and 0 for nameless arguments that
                   2310: correspond to @samp{@dots{}} in the called function's prototype.
                   2311: 
                   2312: The value of the expression should either be a @code{reg} RTX for the
                   2313: hard register in which to pass the argument, or zero to pass the
                   2314: argument on the stack.
                   2315: 
                   2316: For machines like the Vax and 68000, where normally all arguments are
                   2317: pushed, zero suffices as a definition.
                   2318: 
                   2319: @cindex @file{stdarg.h} and register arguments
                   2320: The usual way to make the ANSI library @file{stdarg.h} work on a machine
                   2321: where some arguments are usually passed in registers, is to cause
                   2322: nameless arguments to be passed on the stack instead.  This is done
                   2323: by making @code{FUNCTION_ARG} return 0 whenever @var{named} is 0.
                   2324: 
                   2325: @cindex @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
                   2326: @cindex @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
                   2327: You may use the macro @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})}
                   2328: in the definition of this macro to determine if this argument is of a
                   2329: type that must be passed in the stack.  If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}
                   2330: is not defined and @code{FUNCTION_ARG} returns non-zero for such an
                   2331: argument, the compiler will abort.  If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is
                   2332: defined, the argument will be computed in the stack and then loaded into
                   2333: a register.
                   2334: 
                   2335: @findex FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
                   2336: @item FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
                   2337: Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows'', so
                   2338: that the register in which a function sees an arguments is not
                   2339: necessarily the same as the one in which the caller passed the
                   2340: argument.
                   2341: 
                   2342: For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_ARG} computes the register in which
                   2343: the caller passes the value, and @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} should
                   2344: be defined in a similar fashion to tell the function being called
                   2345: where the arguments will arrive.
                   2346: 
                   2347: If @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} is not defined, @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
                   2348: serves both purposes.@refill
                   2349: 
                   2350: @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
                   2351: @item FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
                   2352: A C expression for the number of words, at the beginning of an
                   2353: argument, must be put in registers.  The value must be zero for
                   2354: arguments that are passed entirely in registers or that are entirely
                   2355: pushed on the stack.
                   2356: 
                   2357: On some machines, certain arguments must be passed partially in
                   2358: registers and partially in memory.  On these machines, typically the
                   2359: first @var{n} words of arguments are passed in registers, and the rest
                   2360: on the stack.  If a multi-word argument (a @code{double} or a
                   2361: structure) crosses that boundary, its first few words must be passed
                   2362: in registers and the rest must be pushed.  This macro tells the
                   2363: compiler when this occurs, and how many of the words should go in
                   2364: registers.
                   2365: 
                   2366: @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for these arguments should return the first
                   2367: register to be used by the caller for this argument; likewise
                   2368: @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG}, for the called function.
                   2369: 
                   2370: @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
                   2371: @item FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
                   2372: A C expression that indicates when an argument must be passed by reference.
                   2373: If nonzero for an argument, a copy of that argument is made in memory and a
                   2374: pointer to the argument is passed instead of the argument itself.
                   2375: The pointer is passed in whatever way is appropriate for passing a pointer
                   2376: to that type.
                   2377: 
                   2378: On machines where @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is not defined, a suitable
                   2379: definition of this macro might be
                   2380: @smallexample
                   2381: #define FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE\
                   2382: (CUM, MODE, TYPE, NAMED)  \
                   2383:   MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (MODE, TYPE)
                   2384: @end smallexample
                   2385: @c this is *still* too long.  --mew 5feb93 
                   2386: 
                   2387: @findex FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES
                   2388: @item FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
                   2389: If defined, a C expression that indicates when it is the called function's
                   2390: responsibility to make a copy of arguments passed by invisible reference.
                   2391: Normally, the caller makes a copy and passes the address of the copy to the
                   2392: routine being called.  When FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES is defined and is
                   2393: nonzero, the caller does not make a copy.  Instead, it passes a pointer to the
                   2394: ``live'' value.  The called function must not modify this value.  If it can be
                   2395: determined that the value won't be modified, it need not make a copy;
                   2396: otherwise a copy must be made.
                   2397: 
                   2398: @findex CUMULATIVE_ARGS
                   2399: @item CUMULATIVE_ARGS
                   2400: A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument of
                   2401: @code{FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values.  For some target machines,
                   2402: the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number of bytes of
                   2403: argument so far.
                   2404: 
                   2405: There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
                   2406: arguments that have been passed on the stack.  The compiler has other
                   2407: variables to keep track of that.  For target machines on which all
                   2408: arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
                   2409: @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
                   2410: should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
                   2411: 
                   2412: @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS
                   2413: @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
                   2414: A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable @var{cum}
                   2415: for the state at the beginning of the argument list.  The variable has
                   2416: type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.  The value of @var{fntype} is the tree node
                   2417: for the data type of the function which will receive the args, or 0
                   2418: if the args are to a compiler support library function.
                   2419: 
                   2420: When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
                   2421: @var{libname} identifies which one.  It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
                   2422: contains the name of the function, as a string.  @var{libname} is 0 when
                   2423: an ordinary C function call is being processed.  Thus, each time this
                   2424: macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
                   2425: never both of them at once.
                   2426: 
                   2427: @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS
                   2428: @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
                   2429: Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
                   2430: finding the arguments for the function being compiled.  If this macro is
                   2431: undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
                   2432: 
                   2433: The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
                   2434: with special calling conventions are never compiled with GNU CC.  The
                   2435: argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
                   2436: @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
                   2437: @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
                   2438: @c --mew 5feb93   i switched the order of the sentences.  --mew 10feb93
                   2439: 
                   2440: @findex FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
                   2441: @item FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
                   2442: A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the summarizer variable
                   2443: @var{cum} to advance past an argument in the argument list.  The
                   2444: values @var{mode}, @var{type} and @var{named} describe that argument.
                   2445: Once this is done, the variable @var{cum} is suitable for analyzing
                   2446: the @emph{following} argument with @code{FUNCTION_ARG}, etc.@refill
                   2447: 
                   2448: This macro need not do anything if the argument in question was passed
                   2449: on the stack.  The compiler knows how to track the amount of stack space
                   2450: used for arguments without any special help.
                   2451: 
                   2452: @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
                   2453: @item FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
                   2454: If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
                   2455: to pad out an argument with extra space.  The value should be of type
                   2456: @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
                   2457: @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
                   2458: 
                   2459: The @emph{amount} of padding is always just enough to reach the next
                   2460: multiple of @code{FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY}; this macro does not control
                   2461: it.
                   2462: 
                   2463: This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
                   2464: For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward.  For
                   2465: big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
                   2466: constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
                   2467: 
                   2468: @findex FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
                   2469: @item FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY (@var{mode}, @var{type})
                   2470: If defined, a C expression that gives the alignment boundary, in bits,
                   2471: of an argument with the specified mode and type.  If it is not defined, 
                   2472: @code{PARM_BOUNDARY} is used for all arguments.
                   2473: 
                   2474: @findex FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P
                   2475: @item FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
                   2476: A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
                   2477: register in which function arguments are sometimes passed.  This does
                   2478: @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
                   2479: the structure-value address.  On many machines, no registers can be
                   2480: used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
                   2481: stack.
                   2482: @end table
                   2483: 
                   2484: @node Scalar Return
                   2485: @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
                   2486: @cindex return values in registers
                   2487: @cindex values, returned by functions
                   2488: @cindex scalars, returned as values
                   2489: 
                   2490: This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
                   2491: values---values that can fit in registers.
                   2492: 
                   2493: @table @code
                   2494: @findex TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
                   2495: @item TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
                   2496: Define this macro if @samp{-traditional} should not cause functions 
                   2497: declared to return @code{float} to convert the value to @code{double}.
                   2498: 
                   2499: @findex FUNCTION_VALUE
                   2500: @item FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
                   2501: A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a
                   2502: function returns a value of data type @var{valtype}.  @var{valtype} is
                   2503: a tree node representing a data type.  Write @code{TYPE_MODE
                   2504: (@var{valtype})} to get the machine mode used to represent that type.
                   2505: On many machines, only the mode is relevant.  (Actually, on most
                   2506: machines, scalar values are returned in the same place regardless of
                   2507: mode).@refill
                   2508: 
                   2509: If @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN} is defined, you must apply the same
                   2510: promotion rules specified in @code{PROMOTE_MODE} if @var{valtype} is a
                   2511: scalar type.
                   2512: 
                   2513: If the precise function being called is known, @var{func} is a tree
                   2514: node (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
                   2515: pointer.  This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
                   2516: convention for specific functions when all their calls are
                   2517: known.@refill
                   2518: 
                   2519: @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} is not used for return vales with aggregate data
                   2520: types, because these are returned in another way.  See
                   2521: @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
                   2522: 
                   2523: @findex FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE
                   2524: @item FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
                   2525: Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows''
                   2526: so that the register in which a function returns its value is not
                   2527: the same as the one in which the caller sees the value.
                   2528: 
                   2529: For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} computes the register in which
                   2530: the caller will see the value.  @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} should be
                   2531: defined in a similar fashion to tell the function where to put the
                   2532: value.@refill
                   2533: 
                   2534: If @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not defined,
                   2535: @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} serves both purposes.@refill
                   2536: 
                   2537: @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not used for return vales with
                   2538: aggregate data types, because these are returned in another way.  See
                   2539: @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
                   2540: 
                   2541: @findex LIBCALL_VALUE
                   2542: @item LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
                   2543: A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
                   2544: function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.  If the precise function
                   2545: being called is known, @var{func} is a tree node
                   2546: (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
                   2547: pointer.  This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
                   2548: convention for specific functions when all their calls are
                   2549: known.@refill
                   2550: 
                   2551: Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
                   2552: support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
                   2553: specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
                   2554: compiled.
                   2555: 
                   2556: The definition of @code{LIBRARY_VALUE} need not be concerned aggregate
                   2557: data types, because none of the library functions returns such types.
                   2558: 
                   2559: @findex FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
                   2560: @item FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
                   2561: A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
                   2562: register in which the values of called function may come back.
                   2563: 
                   2564: A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
                   2565: second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
                   2566: recognized by this macro.  So for most machines, this definition
                   2567: suffices:
                   2568: 
                   2569: @example
                   2570: #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
                   2571: @end example
                   2572: 
                   2573: If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
                   2574: function use different registers for the return value, this macro
                   2575: should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
                   2576: 
                   2577: @findex APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
                   2578: @item APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
                   2579: Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
                   2580: need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
                   2581: saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
                   2582: @end table
                   2583: 
                   2584: @node Aggregate Return
                   2585: @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
                   2586: @cindex aggregates as return values
                   2587: @cindex large return values
                   2588: @cindex returning aggregate values
                   2589: @cindex structure value address
                   2590: 
                   2591: When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
                   2592: cases), the value is not returned according to @code{FUNCTION_VALUE}
                   2593: (@pxref{Scalar Return}).  Instead, the caller passes the address of a
                   2594: block of memory in which the value should be stored.  This address
                   2595: is called the @dfn{structure value address}.
                   2596: 
                   2597: This section describes how to control returning structure values in
                   2598: memory.
                   2599: 
                   2600: @table @code
                   2601: @findex RETURN_IN_MEMORY
                   2602: @item RETURN_IN_MEMORY (@var{type})
                   2603: A C expression which can inhibit the returning of certain function
                   2604: values in registers, based on the type of value.  A nonzero value says
                   2605: to return the function value in memory, just as large structures are
                   2606: always returned.  Here @var{type} will be a C expression of type
                   2607: @code{tree}, representing the data type of the value.
                   2608: 
                   2609: Note that values of mode @code{BLKmode} must be explicitly handled
                   2610: by this macro.  Also, the option @samp{-fpcc-struct-return}
                   2611: takes effect regardless of this macro.  On most systems, it is
                   2612: possible to leave the macro undefined; this causes a default
                   2613: definition to be used, whose value is the constant 1 for @code{BLKmode}
                   2614: values, and 0 otherwise.
                   2615: 
                   2616: Do not use this macro to indicate that structures and unions should always
                   2617: be returned in memory.  You should instead use @code{DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN}
                   2618: to indicate this.
                   2619: 
                   2620: @findex DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
                   2621: @item DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
                   2622: Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
                   2623: in memory.  Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
                   2624: only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI.
                   2625: If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
                   2626: and union return values are decided by the @code{RETURN_IN_MEMORY} macro.
                   2627: 
                   2628: If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
                   2629: 
                   2630: @findex STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
                   2631: @item STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
                   2632: If the structure value address is passed in a register, then
                   2633: @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} should be the number of that register.
                   2634: 
                   2635: @findex STRUCT_VALUE
                   2636: @item STRUCT_VALUE
                   2637: If the structure value address is not passed in a register, define
                   2638: @code{STRUCT_VALUE} as an expression returning an RTX for the place
                   2639: where the address is passed.  If it returns 0, the address is passed as
                   2640: an ``invisible'' first argument.
                   2641: 
                   2642: @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
                   2643: @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
                   2644: On some architectures the place where the structure value address
                   2645: is found by the called function is not the same place that the
                   2646: caller put it.  This can be due to register windows, or it could
                   2647: be because the function prologue moves it to a different place.
                   2648: 
                   2649: If the incoming location of the structure value address is in a
                   2650: register, define this macro as the register number.
                   2651: 
                   2652: @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
                   2653: @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
                   2654: If the incoming location is not a register, then you should define
                   2655: @code{STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING} as an expression for an RTX for where the
                   2656: called function should find the value.  If it should find the value on
                   2657: the stack, define this to create a @code{mem} which refers to the frame
                   2658: pointer.  A definition of 0 means that the address is passed as an
                   2659: ``invisible'' first argument.
                   2660: 
                   2661: @findex PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
                   2662: @item PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
                   2663: Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
                   2664: for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
                   2665: the address of a static variable containing the value.
                   2666: 
                   2667: Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
                   2668: pass an address to the subroutine.
                   2669: 
                   2670: This macro has effect in @samp{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
                   2671: nothing when you use @samp{-freg-struct-return} mode.
                   2672: @end table
                   2673: 
                   2674: @node Caller Saves
                   2675: @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
                   2676: 
                   2677: If you enable it, GNU CC can save registers around function calls.  This
                   2678: makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
                   2679: must live across calls.
                   2680: 
                   2681: @table @code
                   2682: @findex DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
                   2683: @item DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
                   2684: Define this macro if function calls on the target machine do not preserve
                   2685: any registers; in other words, if @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} has 1
                   2686: for all registers.  This macro enables @samp{-fcaller-saves} by default.
                   2687: Eventually that option will be enabled by default on all machines and both
                   2688: the option and this macro will be eliminated.
                   2689: 
                   2690: @findex CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE
                   2691: @item CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE (@var{refs}, @var{calls})
                   2692: A C expression to determine whether it is worthwhile to consider placing
                   2693: a pseudo-register in a call-clobbered hard register and saving and
                   2694: restoring it around each function call.  The expression should be 1 when
                   2695: this is worth doing, and 0 otherwise.
                   2696: 
                   2697: If you don't define this macro, a default is used which is good on most
                   2698: machines: @code{4 * @var{calls} < @var{refs}}.
                   2699: @end table
                   2700: 
                   2701: @node Function Entry
                   2702: @subsection Function Entry and Exit
                   2703: @cindex function entry and exit
                   2704: @cindex prologue
                   2705: @cindex epilogue
                   2706: 
                   2707: This section describes the macros that output function entry
                   2708: (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
                   2709: 
                   2710: @table @code
                   2711: @findex FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
                   2712: @item FUNCTION_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
                   2713: A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for entry to a
                   2714: function.  The prologue is responsible for setting up the stack frame,
                   2715: initializing the frame pointer register, saving registers that must be
                   2716: saved, and allocating @var{size} additional bytes of storage for the
                   2717: local variables.  @var{size} is an integer.  @var{file} is a stdio
                   2718: stream to which the assembler code should be output.
                   2719: 
                   2720: The label for the beginning of the function need not be output by this
                   2721: macro.  That has already been done when the macro is run.
                   2722: 
                   2723: @findex regs_ever_live
                   2724: To determine which registers to save, the macro can refer to the array
                   2725: @code{regs_ever_live}: element @var{r} is nonzero if hard register
                   2726: @var{r} is used anywhere within the function.  This implies the function
                   2727: prologue should save register @var{r}, provided it is not one of the
                   2728: call-used registers.  (@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must likewise use
                   2729: @code{regs_ever_live}.)
                   2730: 
                   2731: On machines that have ``register windows'', the function entry code does
                   2732: not save on the stack the registers that are in the windows, even if
                   2733: they are supposed to be preserved by function calls; instead it takes
                   2734: appropriate steps to ``push'' the register stack, if any non-call-used
                   2735: registers are used in the function.
                   2736: 
                   2737: @findex frame_pointer_needed
                   2738: On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
                   2739: function entry code must vary accordingly; it must set up the frame
                   2740: pointer if one is wanted, and not otherwise.  To determine whether a
                   2741: frame pointer is in wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
                   2742: @code{frame_pointer_needed}.  The variable's value will be 1 at run
                   2743: time in a function that needs a frame pointer.  @xref{Elimination}.
                   2744: 
                   2745: The function entry code is responsible for allocating any stack space
                   2746: required for the function.  This stack space consists of the regions
                   2747: listed below.  In most cases, these regions are allocated in the
                   2748: order listed, with the last listed region closest to the top of the
                   2749: stack (the lowest address if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and
                   2750: the highest address if it is not defined).  You can use a different order
                   2751: for a machine if doing so is more convenient or required for
                   2752: compatibility reasons.  Except in cases where required by standard
                   2753: or by a debugger, there is no reason why the stack layout used by GCC
                   2754: need agree with that used by other compilers for a machine.
                   2755: 
                   2756: @itemize @bullet
                   2757: @item
                   2758: @findex current_function_pretend_args_size
                   2759: A region of @code{current_function_pretend_args_size} bytes of
                   2760: uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
                   2761: stack.  (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
                   2762: if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
                   2763: arguments.  But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
                   2764: yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.)  This
                   2765: region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
                   2766: registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
                   2767: features in @file{varargs.h} and @file{stdargs.h}.
                   2768: 
                   2769: @item
                   2770: An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
                   2771: The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
                   2772: the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
                   2773: machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
                   2774: in the function.  Machines with register windows often do not require
                   2775: a save area.
                   2776: 
                   2777: @item
                   2778: A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
                   2779: boundary, to contain the local variables of the function.  On some machines,
                   2780: this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
                   2781: save area closer to the top of the stack.
                   2782: 
                   2783: @item
                   2784: @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
                   2785: Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
                   2786: @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
                   2787: argument lists of the function.  @xref{Stack Arguments}.
                   2788: @end itemize
                   2789: 
                   2790: Normally, it is necessary for the macros @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
                   2791: @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to treat leaf functions specially.  The C
                   2792: variable @code{leaf_function} is nonzero for such a function.
                   2793: 
                   2794: @findex EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
                   2795: @item EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
                   2796: Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
                   2797: instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
                   2798: pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
                   2799: adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function.
                   2800: 
                   2801: Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
                   2802: frame pointers are maintained.  It is never safe to delete a final
                   2803: stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
                   2804: compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
                   2805: 
                   2806: @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
                   2807: @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
                   2808: A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for exit from a
                   2809: function.  The epilogue is responsible for restoring the saved
                   2810: registers and stack pointer to their values when the function was
                   2811: called, and returning control to the caller.  This macro takes the
                   2812: same arguments as the macro @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}, and the
                   2813: registers to restore are determined from @code{regs_ever_live} and
                   2814: @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} in the same way.
                   2815: 
                   2816: On some machines, there is a single instruction that does all the work
                   2817: of returning from the function.  On these machines, give that
                   2818: instruction the name @samp{return} and do not define the macro
                   2819: @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} at all.
                   2820: 
                   2821: Do not define a pattern named @samp{return} if you want the
                   2822: @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to be used.  If you want the target switches
                   2823: to control whether return instructions or epilogues are used, define a
                   2824: @samp{return} pattern with a validity condition that tests the target
                   2825: switches appropriately.  If the @samp{return} pattern's validity
                   2826: condition is false, epilogues will be used.
                   2827: 
                   2828: On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
                   2829: function exit code must vary accordingly.  Sometimes the code for these
                   2830: two cases is completely different.  To determine whether a frame pointer
                   2831: is wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
                   2832: @code{frame_pointer_needed}.  The variable's value will be 1 when compiling
                   2833: a function that needs a frame pointer.
                   2834: 
                   2835: Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
                   2836: treat leaf functions specially.  The C variable @code{leaf_function} is
                   2837: nonzero for such a function.  @xref{Leaf Functions}.
                   2838: 
                   2839: On some machines, some functions pop their arguments on exit while
                   2840: others leave that for the caller to do.  For example, the 68020 when
                   2841: given @samp{-mrtd} pops arguments in functions that take a fixed
                   2842: number of arguments.
                   2843: 
                   2844: @findex current_function_pops_args
                   2845: Your definition of the macro @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} decides which
                   2846: functions pop their own arguments.  @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} needs to
                   2847: know what was decided.  The variable that is called
                   2848: @code{current_function_pops_args} is the number of bytes of its
                   2849: arguments that a function should pop.  @xref{Scalar Return}.
                   2850: @c what is the "its arguments" in the above sentence referring to, pray
                   2851: @c tell?  --mew 5feb93
                   2852: 
                   2853: @findex DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
                   2854: @item DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
                   2855: Define this macro if the function epilogue contains delay slots to which
                   2856: instructions from the rest of the function can be ``moved''.  The
                   2857: definition should be a C expression whose value is an integer
                   2858: representing the number of delay slots there.
                   2859: 
                   2860: @findex ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY
                   2861: @item ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY (@var{insn}, @var{n})
                   2862: A C expression that returns 1 if @var{insn} can be placed in delay
                   2863: slot number @var{n} of the epilogue.
                   2864: 
                   2865: The argument @var{n} is an integer which identifies the delay slot now
                   2866: being considered (since different slots may have different rules of
                   2867: eligibility).  It is never negative and is always less than the number
                   2868: of epilogue delay slots (what @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE} returns).
                   2869: If you reject a particular insn for a given delay slot, in principle, it
                   2870: may be reconsidered for a subsequent delay slot.  Also, other insns may
                   2871: (at least in principle) be considered for the so far unfilled delay
                   2872: slot.
                   2873: 
                   2874: @findex current_function_epilogue_delay_list
                   2875: @findex final_scan_insn
                   2876: The insns accepted to fill the epilogue delay slots are put in an RTL
                   2877: list made with @code{insn_list} objects, stored in the variable
                   2878: @code{current_function_epilogue_delay_list}.  The insn for the first
                   2879: delay slot comes first in the list.  Your definition of the macro
                   2880: @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} should fill the delay slots by outputting the
                   2881: insns in this list, usually by calling @code{final_scan_insn}.
                   2882: 
                   2883: You need not define this macro if you did not define
                   2884: @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE}.
                   2885: @end table
                   2886: 
                   2887: @node Profiling
                   2888: @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
                   2889: @cindex profiling, code generation
                   2890: 
                   2891: These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
                   2892: 
                   2893: @table @code
                   2894: @findex FUNCTION_PROFILER 
                   2895: @item FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
                   2896: A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
                   2897: assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
                   2898: Before calling, the assembler code must load the address of a
                   2899: counter variable into a register where @code{mcount} expects to
                   2900: find the address.  The name of this variable is @samp{LP} followed
                   2901: by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate the name using
                   2902: @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
                   2903: 
                   2904: @findex mcount
                   2905: The details of how the address should be passed to @code{mcount} are
                   2906: determined by your operating system environment, not by GNU CC.  To
                   2907: figure them out, compile a small program for profiling using the
                   2908: system's installed C compiler and look at the assembler code that
                   2909: results.
                   2910: 
                   2911: @findex PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
                   2912: @item PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
                   2913: Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
                   2914: the function prologue.  Normally, the profiling code comes after.
                   2915: 
                   2916: @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER
                   2917: @findex __bb_init_func
                   2918: @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
                   2919: A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
                   2920: assembler code to initialize basic-block profiling for the current
                   2921: object module.  This code should call the subroutine
                   2922: @code{__bb_init_func} once per object module, passing it as its sole
                   2923: argument the address of a block allocated in the object module.
                   2924: 
                   2925: The name of the block is a local symbol made with this statement:
                   2926: 
                   2927: @example
                   2928: ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
                   2929: @end example
                   2930: 
                   2931: Of course, since you are writing the definition of
                   2932: @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
                   2933: can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
                   2934: that you know will result.
                   2935: 
                   2936: The first word of this block is a flag which will be nonzero if the
                   2937: object module has already been initialized.  So test this word first,
                   2938: and do not call @code{__bb_init_func} if the flag is nonzero.
                   2939: 
                   2940: @findex BLOCK_PROFILER
                   2941: @item BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{blockno})
                   2942: A C statement or compound statement to increment the count associated
                   2943: with the basic block number @var{blockno}.  Basic blocks are numbered
                   2944: separately from zero within each compilation.  The count associated
                   2945: with block number @var{blockno} is at index @var{blockno} in a vector
                   2946: of words; the name of this array is a local symbol made with this
                   2947: statement:
                   2948: 
                   2949: @example
                   2950: ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 2);
                   2951: @end example
                   2952: 
                   2953: @c This paragraph is the same as one a few paragraphs up.
                   2954: @c That is not an error.
                   2955: Of course, since you are writing the definition of
                   2956: @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
                   2957: can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
                   2958: that you know will result.
                   2959: 
                   2960: @findex BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
                   2961: @item BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
                   2962: A C function or functions which are needed in the library to
                   2963: support block profiling.
                   2964: @end table
                   2965: 
                   2966: @node Varargs
                   2967: @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
                   2968: @cindex varargs implementation
                   2969: 
                   2970: GNU CC comes with an implementation of @file{varargs.h} and
                   2971: @file{stdarg.h} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
                   2972: on the stack.  Other machines require their own implementations of
                   2973: varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
                   2974: conditionals to include it.
                   2975: 
                   2976: ANSI @file{stdarg.h} differs from traditional @file{varargs.h} mainly in
                   2977: the calling convention for @code{va_start}.  The traditional
                   2978: implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
                   2979: to store the argument pointer.  The ANSI implementation of
                   2980: @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument.  The user is
                   2981: supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
                   2982: 
                   2983: However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument.  The way to find
                   2984: the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
                   2985: below.
                   2986: 
                   2987: @table @code
                   2988: @findex __builtin_saveregs
                   2989: @item __builtin_saveregs ()
                   2990: Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
                   2991: that the varargs mechanism can access them.  Both ANSI and traditional
                   2992: versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
                   2993: you use @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
                   2994: 
                   2995: On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
                   2996: control of the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}.  On other machines,
                   2997: it calls a routine written in assembler language, found in
                   2998: @file{libgcc2.c}.
                   2999: 
                   3000: Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
                   3001: beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
                   3002: @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
                   3003: This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
                   3004: to use them for its own purposes.
                   3005: @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
                   3006: @c 10feb93 
                   3007: 
                   3008: @findex __builtin_args_info
                   3009: @item __builtin_args_info (@var{category})
                   3010: Use this built-in function to find the first anonymous arguments in
                   3011: registers.
                   3012: 
                   3013: In general, a machine may have several categories of registers used for
                   3014: arguments, each for a particular category of data types.  (For example,
                   3015: on some machines, floating-point registers are used for floating-point
                   3016: arguments while other arguments are passed in the general registers.)
                   3017: To make non-varargs functions use the proper calling convention, you
                   3018: have defined the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data type to record how many
                   3019: registers in each category have been used so far
                   3020: 
                   3021: @code{__builtin_args_info} accesses the same data structure of type
                   3022: @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} after the ordinary argument layout is finished
                   3023: with it, with @var{category} specifying which word to access.  Thus, the
                   3024: value indicates the first unused register in a given category.
                   3025: 
                   3026: Normally, you would use @code{__builtin_args_info} in the implementation
                   3027: of @code{va_start}, accessing each category just once and storing the
                   3028: value in the @code{va_list} object.  This is because @code{va_list} will
                   3029: have to update the values, and there is no way to alter the
                   3030: values accessed by @code{__builtin_args_info}.
                   3031: 
                   3032: @findex __builtin_next_arg
                   3033: @item __builtin_next_arg ()
                   3034: This is the equivalent of @code{__builtin_args_info}, for stack
                   3035: arguments.  It returns the address of the first anonymous stack
                   3036: argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
                   3037: returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
                   3038: argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
                   3039: fetching arguments from the stack. 
                   3040: 
                   3041: @findex __builtin_classify_type
                   3042: @item __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
                   3043: Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
                   3044: passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
                   3045: has to embody these conventions.  The easiest way to categorize the
                   3046: specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
                   3047: with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
                   3048: 
                   3049: @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
                   3050: considering only its data type.  It returns an integer describing what
                   3051: kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
                   3052: 
                   3053: The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
                   3054: interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
                   3055: @end table
                   3056: 
                   3057: These machine description macros help implement varargs: 
                   3058: 
                   3059: @table @code
                   3060: @findex EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
                   3061: @item EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS (@var{args})
                   3062: If defined, is a C expression that produces the machine-specific code
                   3063: for a call to @code{__builtin_saveregs}.  This code will be moved to the
                   3064: very beginning of the function, before any parameter access are made.
                   3065: The return value of this function should be an RTX that contains the
                   3066: value to use as the return of @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
                   3067: 
                   3068: The argument @var{args} is a @code{tree_list} containing the arguments
                   3069: that were passed to @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
                   3070: 
                   3071: If this macro is not defined, the compiler will output an ordinary
                   3072: call to the library function @samp{__builtin_saveregs}.
                   3073: 
                   3074: @c !!! a bug in texinfo; how to make the entry on the @item line allow
                   3075: @c more than one line of text... help...  --mew 10feb93
                   3076: @findex SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
                   3077: @item SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS (@var{args_so_far}, @var{mode}, @var{type},
                   3078: @var{pretend_args_size}, @var{second_time})  
                   3079: This macro offers an alternative to using @code{__builtin_saveregs} and
                   3080: defining the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}.  Use it to store the
                   3081: anonymous register arguments into the stack so that all the arguments
                   3082: appear to have been passed consecutively on the stack.  Once this is
                   3083: done, you can use the standard implementation of varargs that works for
                   3084: machines that pass all their arguments on the stack.
                   3085: 
                   3086: The argument @var{args_so_far} is the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data
                   3087: structure, containing the values that obtain after processing of the
                   3088: named arguments.  The arguments @var{mode} and @var{type} describe the
                   3089: last named argument---its machine mode and its data type as a tree node.
                   3090: 
                   3091: The macro implementation should do two things: first, push onto the
                   3092: stack all the argument registers @emph{not} used for the named
                   3093: arguments, and second, store the size of the data thus pushed into the
                   3094: @code{int}-valued variable whose name is supplied as the argument
                   3095: @var{pretend_args_size}.  The value that you store here will serve as
                   3096: additional offset for setting up the stack frame.
                   3097: 
                   3098: Because you must generate code to push the anonymous arguments at
                   3099: compile time without knowing their data types,
                   3100: @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is only useful on machines that have just
                   3101: a single category of argument register and use it uniformly for all data
                   3102: types.
                   3103: 
                   3104: If the argument @var{second_time} is nonzero, it means that the
                   3105: arguments of the function are being analyzed for the second time.  This
                   3106: happens for an inline function, which is not actually compiled until the
                   3107: end of the source file.  The macro @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} should
                   3108: not generate any instructions in this case.
                   3109: @end table
                   3110: 
                   3111: @node Trampolines
                   3112: @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
                   3113: @cindex trampolines for nested functions
                   3114: @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
                   3115: 
                   3116: A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
                   3117: when the address of a nested function is taken.  It normally resides on
                   3118: the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function.  These macros
                   3119: tell GNU CC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
                   3120: trampoline.
                   3121: 
                   3122: The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
                   3123: address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
                   3124: the nested function.  On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
                   3125: two instructions, a move immediate and a jump.  Then the two addresses
                   3126: exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands.  On RISC
                   3127: machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
                   3128: two parts.  Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
                   3129: operands.
                   3130: 
                   3131: The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
                   3132: parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
                   3133: immediate operands of the instructions.  On a CISC machine, this is
                   3134: simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
                   3135: proper offset from the start of the trampoline.  On a RISC machine, it
                   3136: may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
                   3137: separately.
                   3138: 
                   3139: @table @code
                   3140: @findex TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
                   3141: @item TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE (@var{file})
                   3142: A C statement to output, on the stream @var{file}, assembler code for a
                   3143: block of data that contains the constant parts of a trampoline.  This
                   3144: code should not include a label---the label is taken care of
                   3145: automatically.
                   3146: 
                   3147: @findex TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
                   3148: @item TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
                   3149: The name of a subroutine to switch to the section in which the
                   3150: trampoline template is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}).  The default is
                   3151: a value of @samp{readonly_data_section}, which places the trampoline in
                   3152: the section containing read-only data. 
                   3153: 
                   3154: @findex TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
                   3155: @item TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
                   3156: A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
                   3157: 
                   3158: @findex TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
                   3159: @item TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
                   3160: Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
                   3161: 
                   3162: If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
                   3163: is used for aligning trampolines.
                   3164: 
                   3165: @findex INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE
                   3166: @item INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{addr}, @var{fnaddr}, @var{static_chain})
                   3167: A C statement to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
                   3168: @var{addr} is an RTX for the address of the trampoline; @var{fnaddr} is
                   3169: an RTX for the address of the nested function; @var{static_chain} is an
                   3170: RTX for the static chain value that should be passed to the function
                   3171: when it is called.
                   3172: 
                   3173: @findex ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE
                   3174: @item ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{fp})
                   3175: A C expression to allocate run-time space for a trampoline.  The
                   3176: expression value should be an RTX representing a memory reference to the
                   3177: space for the trampoline.
                   3178: 
                   3179: @cindex @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} and trampolines
                   3180: @cindex @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and trampolines
                   3181: If this macro is not defined, by default the trampoline is allocated as
                   3182: a stack slot.  This default is right for most machines.  The exceptions
                   3183: are machines where it is impossible to execute instructions in the stack
                   3184: area.  On such machines, you may have to implement a separate stack,
                   3185: using this macro in conjunction with @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
                   3186: @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}.
                   3187: 
                   3188: @var{fp} points to a data structure, a @code{struct function}, which
                   3189: describes the compilation status of the immediate containing function of
                   3190: the function which the trampoline is for.  Normally (when
                   3191: @code{ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE} is not defined), the stack slot for the
                   3192: trampoline is in the stack frame of this containing function.  Other
                   3193: allocation strategies probably must do something analogous with this
                   3194: information.
                   3195: @end table
                   3196: 
                   3197: Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
                   3198: separate instruction and data caches.  Writing into a stack location
                   3199: fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
                   3200: jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
                   3201: 
                   3202: Here are two possible solutions.  One is to clear the relevant parts of
                   3203: the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up.  The other is to
                   3204: make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
                   3205: subroutine.  The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
                   3206: latter makes initialization faster.
                   3207: 
                   3208: To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
                   3209: the following macros which describe the shape of the cache.
                   3210: 
                   3211: @table @code
                   3212: @findex INSN_CACHE_SIZE
                   3213: @item INSN_CACHE_SIZE
                   3214: The total size in bytes of the cache.
                   3215: 
                   3216: @findex INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
                   3217: @item INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
                   3218: The length in bytes of each cache line.  The cache is divided into cache
                   3219: lines which are disjoint slots, each holding a contiguous chunk of data
                   3220: fetched from memory.  Each time data is brought into the cache, an
                   3221: entire line is read at once.  The data loaded into a cache line is 
                   3222: always aligned on a boundary equal to the line size.
                   3223: 
                   3224: @findex INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
                   3225: @item INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
                   3226: The number of alternative cache lines that can hold any particular memory
                   3227: location.
                   3228: @end table
                   3229: 
                   3230: Alternatively, if the machine has system calls or instructions to clear
                   3231: the instruction cache directly, you can define the following macro.
                   3232: 
                   3233: @table @code
                   3234: @findex CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (BEG, END)
                   3235: @item
                   3236: If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
                   3237: cache} in the specified interval.  If it is not defined, and the macro
                   3238: INSN_CACHE_SIZE is defined, some generic code is generated to clear the
                   3239: cache.  The definition of this macro would typically be a series of
                   3240: @code{asm} statements.  Both @var{BEG} and @var{END} are both pointer 
                   3241: expressions. 
                   3242: @end table
                   3243: 
                   3244: To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro.  In addition,
                   3245: you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
                   3246: cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
                   3247: beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
                   3248: its cache line.  Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
                   3249: 
                   3250: @table @code
                   3251: @findex TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
                   3252: @item TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
                   3253: Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
                   3254: work.  The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
                   3255: which will be compiled with GNU CC.  They go in a library function named
                   3256: @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
                   3257: 
                   3258: If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
                   3259: C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
                   3260: special label of your own in the assembler code.  Use one @code{asm}
                   3261: statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
                   3262: global.  Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
                   3263: special assembler code.
                   3264: @end table
                   3265: 
                   3266: @node Library Calls
                   3267: @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
                   3268: @cindex library subroutine names
                   3269: @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
                   3270: 
                   3271: @table @code
                   3272: @findex MULSI3_LIBCALL
                   3273: @item MULSI3_LIBCALL
                   3274: A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
                   3275: multiplication of one signed full-word by another.  If you do not
                   3276: define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__mulsi3},
                   3277: a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
                   3278: 
                   3279: @findex DIVSI3_LIBCALL
                   3280: @item DIVSI3_LIBCALL
                   3281: A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
                   3282: division of one signed full-word by another.  If you do not define
                   3283: this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divsi3}, a
                   3284: function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
                   3285: 
                   3286: @findex UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
                   3287: @item UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
                   3288: A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
                   3289: division of one unsigned full-word by another.  If you do not define
                   3290: this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivsi3}, a
                   3291: function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
                   3292: 
                   3293: @findex MODSI3_LIBCALL
                   3294: @item MODSI3_LIBCALL
                   3295: A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
                   3296: remainder in division of one signed full-word by another.  If you do
                   3297: not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
                   3298: @code{__modsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
                   3299: 
                   3300: @findex UMODSI3_LIBCALL
                   3301: @item UMODSI3_LIBCALL
                   3302: A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
                   3303: remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another.  If you do
                   3304: not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
                   3305: @code{__umodsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
                   3306: 
                   3307: @findex MULDI3_LIBCALL
                   3308: @item MULDI3_LIBCALL
                   3309: A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
                   3310: multiplication of one signed double-word by another.  If you do not
                   3311: define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__muldi3},
                   3312: a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
                   3313: 
                   3314: @findex DIVDI3_LIBCALL
                   3315: @item DIVDI3_LIBCALL
                   3316: A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
                   3317: division of one signed double-word by another.  If you do not define
                   3318: this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divdi3}, a
                   3319: function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
                   3320: 
                   3321: @findex UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
                   3322: @item UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
                   3323: A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
                   3324: division of one unsigned full-word by another.  If you do not define
                   3325: this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivdi3}, a
                   3326: function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
                   3327: 
                   3328: @findex MODDI3_LIBCALL
                   3329: @item MODDI3_LIBCALL
                   3330: A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
                   3331: remainder in division of one signed double-word by another.  If you do
                   3332: not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
                   3333: @code{__moddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
                   3334: 
                   3335: @findex UMODDI3_LIBCALL
                   3336: @item UMODDI3_LIBCALL
                   3337: A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
                   3338: remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another.  If you do
                   3339: not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
                   3340: @code{__umoddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
                   3341: 
                   3342: @findex TARGET_EDOM
                   3343: @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
                   3344: @item TARGET_EDOM
                   3345: The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
                   3346: expression.  If you don't define this macro, GNU CC does not attempt to
                   3347: deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly.  Look in
                   3348: @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
                   3349: system.
                   3350: 
                   3351: If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
                   3352: domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
                   3353: error.  If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
                   3354: there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
                   3355: that @code{matherr} is used normally.
                   3356: 
                   3357: @findex GEN_ERRNO_RTX
                   3358: @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
                   3359: @item GEN_ERRNO_RTX
                   3360: Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
                   3361: refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}.  (On certain systems,
                   3362: @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.)  If you don't define this
                   3363: macro, a reasonable default is used.
                   3364: 
                   3365: @findex TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
                   3366: @cindex @code{bcopy}, implicit usage
                   3367: @cindex @code{memcpy}, implicit usage
                   3368: @cindex @code{bzero}, implicit usage
                   3369: @cindex @code{memset}, implicit usage
                   3370: @item TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
                   3371: Define this macro if GNU CC should generate calls to the System V
                   3372: (and ANSI C) library functions @code{memcpy} and @code{memset}
                   3373: rather than the BSD functions @code{bcopy} and @code{bzero}.
                   3374: 
                   3375: @findex LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
                   3376: @item LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
                   3377: Define this macro if only @code{float} arguments cannot be passed to
                   3378: library routines (so they must be converted to @code{double}).  This
                   3379: macro affects both how library calls are generated and how the library
                   3380: routines in @file{libgcc1.c} accept their arguments.  It is useful on
                   3381: machines where floating and fixed point arguments are passed
                   3382: differently, such as the i860.
                   3383: 
                   3384: @findex FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
                   3385: @item FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
                   3386: Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
                   3387: pick up arguments of type @code{float}.  (By default, they use a union
                   3388: of @code{float} and @code{int}.)
                   3389: 
                   3390: The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
                   3391: traditional C compilers that expect all arguments declared as @code{float}
                   3392: to arrive as @code{double}.  To avoid this conversion, the library routines
                   3393: ask for the value as some other type and then treat it as a @code{float}.
                   3394: 
                   3395: On some systems, no other type will work for this.  For these systems,
                   3396: you must use @code{LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE} instead, to force conversion of
                   3397: the values @code{double} before they are passed.
                   3398: 
                   3399: @findex FLOATIFY
                   3400: @item FLOATIFY (@var{passed-value})
                   3401: Define this macro to override the way library routines redesignate a
                   3402: @code{float} argument as a @code{float} instead of the type it was
                   3403: passed as.  The default is an expression which takes the @code{float}
                   3404: field of the union.
                   3405: 
                   3406: @findex FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
                   3407: @item FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
                   3408: Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
                   3409: return values that ought to have type @code{float}.  (By default, they
                   3410: use @code{int}.)
                   3411: 
                   3412: The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
                   3413: traditional C compilers gratuitously convert values declared as
                   3414: @code{float} into @code{double}.
                   3415: 
                   3416: @findex INTIFY
                   3417: @item INTIFY (@var{float-value})
                   3418: Define this macro to override the way the value of a
                   3419: @code{float}-returning library routine should be packaged in order to
                   3420: return it.  These functions are actually declared to return type 
                   3421: @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} (normally @code{int}).
                   3422: 
                   3423: These values can't be returned as type @code{float} because traditional
                   3424: C compilers would gratuitously convert the value to a @code{double}.
                   3425: 
                   3426: A local variable named @code{intify} is always available when the macro
                   3427: @code{INTIFY} is used.  It is a union of a @code{float} field named
                   3428: @code{f} and a field named @code{i} whose type is
                   3429: @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} or @code{int}.
                   3430: 
                   3431: If you don't define this macro, the default definition works by copying
                   3432: the value through that union.
                   3433: 
                   3434: @findex nongcc_SI_type
                   3435: @item nongcc_SI_type
                   3436: Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to
                   3437: @code{SImode} in the system's own C compiler.
                   3438: 
                   3439: You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
                   3440: is.
                   3441: 
                   3442: @findex nongcc_word_type
                   3443: @item nongcc_word_type
                   3444: Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to the 
                   3445: word_mode in the system's own C compiler.
                   3446: 
                   3447: You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
                   3448: is.
                   3449: 
                   3450: @findex perform_@dots{}
                   3451: @item perform_@dots{}
                   3452: Define these macros to supply explicit C statements to carry out various
                   3453: arithmetic operations on types @code{float} and @code{double} in the
                   3454: library routines in @file{libgcc1.c}.  See that file for a full list
                   3455: of these macros and their arguments.
                   3456: 
                   3457: On most machines, you don't need to define any of these macros, because
                   3458: the C compiler that comes with the system takes care of doing them.
                   3459: 
                   3460: @findex NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
                   3461: @item NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
                   3462: Define this macro to generate code for Objective C message sending using
                   3463: the calling convention of the NeXT system.  This calling convention
                   3464: involves passing the object, the selector and the method arguments all
                   3465: at once to the method-lookup library function.
                   3466: 
                   3467: The default calling convention passes just the object and the selector
                   3468: to the lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
                   3469: @end table
                   3470: 
                   3471: @node Addressing Modes
                   3472: @section Addressing Modes
                   3473: @cindex addressing modes
                   3474: 
                   3475: @table @code
                   3476: @findex HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
                   3477: @item HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
                   3478: Define this macro if the machine supports post-increment addressing.
                   3479: 
                   3480: @findex HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
                   3481: @findex HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
                   3482: @findex HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
                   3483: @item HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
                   3484: @itemx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
                   3485: @itemx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
                   3486: Similar for other kinds of addressing.
                   3487: 
                   3488: @findex CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P
                   3489: @item CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
                   3490: A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
                   3491: is a valid address.  On most machines, this can be defined as
                   3492: @code{CONSTANT_P (@var{x})}, but a few machines are more restrictive
                   3493: in which constant addresses are supported.
                   3494: 
                   3495: @findex CONSTANT_P
                   3496: @code{CONSTANT_P} accepts integer-values expressions whose values are
                   3497: not explicitly known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and
                   3498: @code{high} expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in
                   3499: addition to @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
                   3500: 
                   3501: @findex MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
                   3502: @item MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
                   3503: A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
                   3504: memory address.  Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
                   3505: the maximum number that @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} would ever
                   3506: accept.
                   3507: 
                   3508: @findex GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS
                   3509: @item GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{label})
                   3510: A C compound statement with a conditional @code{goto @var{label};}
                   3511: executed if @var{x} (an RTX) is a legitimate memory address on the
                   3512: target machine for a memory operand of mode @var{mode}.
                   3513: 
                   3514: It usually pays to define several simpler macros to serve as
                   3515: subroutines for this one.  Otherwise it may be too complicated to
                   3516: understand.
                   3517: 
                   3518: This macro must exist in two variants: a strict variant and a
                   3519: non-strict one.  The strict variant is used in the reload pass.  It
                   3520: must be defined so that any pseudo-register that has not been
                   3521: allocated a hard register is considered a memory reference.  In
                   3522: contexts where some kind of register is required, a pseudo-register
                   3523: with no hard register must be rejected.
                   3524: 
                   3525: The non-strict variant is used in other passes.  It must be defined to
                   3526: accept all pseudo-registers in every context where some kind of
                   3527: register is required.
                   3528: 
                   3529: @findex REG_OK_STRICT
                   3530: Compiler source files that want to use the strict variant of this
                   3531: macro define the macro @code{REG_OK_STRICT}.  You should use an
                   3532: @code{#ifdef REG_OK_STRICT} conditional to define the strict variant
                   3533: in that case and the non-strict variant otherwise.
                   3534: 
                   3535: Subroutines to check for acceptable registers for various purposes (one
                   3536: for base registers, one for index registers, and so on) are typically
                   3537: among the subroutines used to define @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.
                   3538: Then only these subroutine macros need have two variants; the higher
                   3539: levels of macros may be the same whether strict or not.@refill
                   3540: 
                   3541: Normally, constant addresses which are the sum of a @code{symbol_ref}
                   3542: and an integer are stored inside a @code{const} RTX to mark them as
                   3543: constant.  Therefore, there is no need to recognize such sums
                   3544: specifically as legitimate addresses.  Normally you would simply
                   3545: recognize any @code{const} as legitimate.
                   3546: 
                   3547: Usually @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS} is not prepared to handle constant
                   3548: sums that are not marked with  @code{const}.  It assumes that a naked
                   3549: @code{plus} indicates indexing.  If so, then you @emph{must} reject such
                   3550: naked constant sums as illegitimate addresses, so that none of them will
                   3551: be given to @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
                   3552: 
                   3553: @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} and address validation
                   3554: On some machines, whether a symbolic address is legitimate depends on
                   3555: the section that the address refers to.  On these machines, define the
                   3556: macro @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
                   3557: @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here.  When you see a
                   3558: @code{const}, you will have to look inside it to find the
                   3559: @code{symbol_ref} in order to determine the section.  @xref{Assembler
                   3560: Format}.
                   3561: 
                   3562: @findex saveable_obstack
                   3563: The best way to modify the name string is by adding text to the
                   3564: beginning, with suitable punctuation to prevent any ambiguity.  Allocate
                   3565: the new name in @code{saveable_obstack}.  You will have to modify
                   3566: @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to remove and decode the added text and
                   3567: output the name accordingly, and define @code{STRIP_NAME_ENCODING} to
                   3568: access the original name string.
                   3569: 
                   3570: You can check the information stored here into the @code{symbol_ref} in
                   3571: the definitions of the macros @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and
                   3572: @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
                   3573: 
                   3574: @findex REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P
                   3575: @item REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x})
                   3576: A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
                   3577: RTX) is valid for use as a base register.  For hard registers, it
                   3578: should always accept those which the hardware permits and reject the
                   3579: others.  Whether the macro accepts or rejects pseudo registers must be
                   3580: controlled by @code{REG_OK_STRICT} as described above.  This usually
                   3581: requires two variant definitions, of which @code{REG_OK_STRICT}
                   3582: controls the one actually used.
                   3583: 
                   3584: @findex REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
                   3585: @item REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{x})
                   3586: A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
                   3587: RTX) is valid for use as an index register.
                   3588: 
                   3589: The difference between an index register and a base register is that
                   3590: the index register may be scaled.  If an address involves the sum of
                   3591: two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
                   3592: labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
                   3593: labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
                   3594: may serve in each capacity.  The compiler will try both labelings,
                   3595: looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
                   3596: only if neither labeling works.
                   3597: 
                   3598: @findex LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
                   3599: @item LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{oldx}, @var{mode}, @var{win})
                   3600: A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x} with a valid
                   3601: memory address for an operand of mode @var{mode}.  @var{win} will be a
                   3602: C statement label elsewhere in the code; the macro definition may use
                   3603: 
                   3604: @example
                   3605: GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{win});
                   3606: @end example
                   3607: 
                   3608: @noindent
                   3609: to avoid further processing if the address has become legitimate.
                   3610: 
                   3611: @findex break_out_memory_refs
                   3612: @var{x} will always be the result of a call to @code{break_out_memory_refs},
                   3613: and @var{oldx} will be the operand that was given to that function to produce
                   3614: @var{x}.
                   3615: 
                   3616: The code generated by this macro should not alter the substructure of
                   3617: @var{x}.  If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
                   3618: should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
                   3619: 
                   3620: It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
                   3621: address.  The compiler has standard ways of doing so in all cases.  In
                   3622: fact, it is safe for this macro to do nothing.  But often a
                   3623: machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
                   3624: 
                   3625: @findex GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS
                   3626: @item GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS (@var{addr}, @var{label})
                   3627: A C statement or compound statement with a conditional @code{goto
                   3628: @var{label};} executed if memory address @var{x} (an RTX) can have
                   3629: different meanings depending on the machine mode of the memory
                   3630: reference it is used for or if the address is valid for some modes
                   3631: but not others.
                   3632: 
                   3633: Autoincrement and autodecrement addresses typically have mode-dependent
                   3634: effects because the amount of the increment or decrement is the size
                   3635: of the operand being addressed.  Some machines have other mode-dependent
                   3636: addresses.  Many RISC machines have no mode-dependent addresses.
                   3637: 
                   3638: You may assume that @var{addr} is a valid address for the machine.
                   3639: 
                   3640: @findex LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
                   3641: @item LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
                   3642: A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate constant for
                   3643: an immediate operand on the target machine.  You can assume that
                   3644: @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not check this.  In fact,
                   3645: @samp{1} is a suitable definition for this macro on machines where
                   3646: anything @code{CONSTANT_P} is valid.@refill
                   3647: @end table
                   3648: 
                   3649: @node Condition Code
                   3650: @section Condition Code Status
                   3651: @cindex condition code status
                   3652: 
                   3653: @findex cc_status
                   3654: The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
                   3655: describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
                   3656: the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by).  This
                   3657: variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
                   3658: currently based, and several standard flags.
                   3659: 
                   3660: Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
                   3661: description header file.  It can also add additional machine-specific
                   3662: information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
                   3663: 
                   3664: @table @code
                   3665: @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP
                   3666: @item CC_STATUS_MDEP
                   3667: C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
                   3668: component of @code{cc_status}.  It defaults to @code{int}.
                   3669: 
                   3670: This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
                   3671: 
                   3672: @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
                   3673: @item CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
                   3674: A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
                   3675: The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
                   3676: the field anyway.  If you want to use the field, you should probably
                   3677: define this macro to initialize it.
                   3678: 
                   3679: This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
                   3680: 
                   3681: @findex NOTICE_UPDATE_CC
                   3682: @item NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
                   3683: A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
                   3684: appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}.  It is
                   3685: this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
                   3686: code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
                   3687: set @code{(cc0)}.
                   3688: 
                   3689: This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
                   3690: 
                   3691: If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
                   3692: other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
                   3693: invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
                   3694: reflecting.  For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
                   3695: registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
                   3696: @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
                   3697: insns.  But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
                   3698: based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
                   3699: value in @samp{a4}.  Although the condition code is not changed by
                   3700: this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
                   3701: @samp{a4@@(102)}.  Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
                   3702: @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
                   3703: condition code value.
                   3704: 
                   3705: The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
                   3706: with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
                   3707: @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
                   3708: constants which are just the operands.  The RTL structure of these
                   3709: insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do.  What
                   3710: @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
                   3711: @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
                   3712: 
                   3713: A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
                   3714: that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
                   3715: @samp{cc}.  This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
                   3716: two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
                   3717: 
                   3718: @findex EXTRA_CC_MODES
                   3719: @item EXTRA_CC_MODES
                   3720: A list of names to be used for additional modes for condition code
                   3721: values in registers (@pxref{Jump Patterns}).  These names are added
                   3722: to @code{enum machine_mode} and all have class @code{MODE_CC}.  By
                   3723: convention, they should start with @samp{CC} and end with @samp{mode}.
                   3724: 
                   3725: You should only define this macro if your machine does not use @code{cc0}
                   3726: and only if additional modes are required.
                   3727: 
                   3728: @findex EXTRA_CC_NAMES
                   3729: @item EXTRA_CC_NAMES
                   3730: A list of C strings giving the names for the modes listed in
                   3731: @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES}.  For example, the Sparc defines this macro and
                   3732: @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} as
                   3733: 
                   3734: @smallexample
                   3735: #define EXTRA_CC_MODES CC_NOOVmode, CCFPmode
                   3736: #define EXTRA_CC_NAMES "CC_NOOV", "CCFP"
                   3737: @end smallexample
                   3738: 
                   3739: This macro is not required if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
                   3740: 
                   3741: @findex SELECT_CC_MODE
                   3742: @item SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
                   3743: Returns a mode from class @code{MODE_CC} to be used when comparison
                   3744: operation code @var{op} is applied to rtx @var{x} and @var{y}.  For
                   3745: example, on the Sparc, @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} is defined as (see
                   3746: @pxref{Jump Patterns} for a description of the reason for this
                   3747: definition)
                   3748: 
                   3749: @smallexample
                   3750: #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
                   3751:   (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT          \
                   3752:    ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode)    \
                   3753:    : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS    \
                   3754:        || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
                   3755:       ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
                   3756: @end smallexample
                   3757: 
                   3758: This macro is not required if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
                   3759: @end table
                   3760: 
                   3761: @node Costs
                   3762: @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
                   3763: @cindex costs of instructions
                   3764: @cindex relative costs
                   3765: @cindex speed of instructions
                   3766: 
                   3767: These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
                   3768: on the target machine.
                   3769: 
                   3770: @table @code
                   3771: @findex CONST_COSTS 
                   3772: @item CONST_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
                   3773: A part of a C @code{switch} statement that describes the relative costs
                   3774: of constant RTL expressions.  It must contain @code{case} labels for
                   3775: expression codes @code{const_int}, @code{const}, @code{symbol_ref},
                   3776: @code{label_ref} and @code{const_double}.  Each case must ultimately
                   3777: reach a @code{return} statement to return the relative cost of the use
                   3778: of that kind of constant value in an expression.  The cost may depend on
                   3779: the precise value of the constant, which is available for examination in
                   3780: @var{x}, and the rtx code of the expression in which it is contained,
                   3781: found in @var{outer_code}.
                   3782: 
                   3783: @var{code} is the expression code---redundant, since it can be
                   3784: obtained with @code{GET_CODE (@var{x})}.
                   3785: 
                   3786: @findex RTX_COSTS 
                   3787: @findex COSTS_N_INSNS
                   3788: @item RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
                   3789: Like @code{CONST_COSTS} but applies to nonconstant RTL expressions.
                   3790: This can be used, for example, to indicate how costly a multiply
                   3791: instruction is.  In writing this macro, you can use the construct
                   3792: @code{COSTS_N_INSNS (@var{n})} to specify a cost equal to @var{n} fast
                   3793: instructions.  @var{outer_code} is the code of the expression in which
                   3794: @var{x} is contained.
                   3795: 
                   3796: This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
                   3797: are adequate for the target machine.
                   3798: 
                   3799: @findex ADDRESS_COST
                   3800: @item ADDRESS_COST (@var{address})
                   3801: An expression giving the cost of an addressing mode that contains
                   3802: @var{address}.  If not defined, the cost is computed from
                   3803: the @var{address} expression and the @code{CONST_COSTS} values.
                   3804: 
                   3805: For most CISC machines, the default cost is a good approximation of the
                   3806: true cost of the addressing mode.  However, on RISC machines, all
                   3807: instructions normally have the same length and execution time.  Hence
                   3808: all addresses will have equal costs.
                   3809: 
                   3810: In cases where more than one form of an address is known, the form with
                   3811: the lowest cost will be used.  If multiple forms have the same, lowest,
                   3812: cost, the one that is the most complex will be used.
                   3813: 
                   3814: For example, suppose an address that is equal to the sum of a register
                   3815: and a constant is used twice in the same basic block.  When this macro
                   3816: is not defined, the address will be computed in a register and memory
                   3817: references will be indirect through that register.  On machines where
                   3818: the cost of the addressing mode containing the sum is no higher than
                   3819: that of a simple indirect reference, this will produce an additional
                   3820: instruction and possibly require an additional register.  Proper
                   3821: specification of this macro eliminates this overhead for such machines.
                   3822: 
                   3823: Similar use of this macro is made in strength reduction of loops.
                   3824: 
                   3825: @var{address} need not be valid as an address.  In such a case, the cost
                   3826: is not relevant and can be any value; invalid addresses need not be
                   3827: assigned a different cost.
                   3828: 
                   3829: On machines where an address involving more than one register is as
                   3830: cheap as an address computation involving only one register, defining
                   3831: @code{ADDRESS_COST} to reflect this can cause two registers to be live
                   3832: over a region of code where only one would have been if
                   3833: @code{ADDRESS_COST} were not defined in that manner.  This effect should
                   3834: be considered in the definition of this macro.  Equivalent costs should
                   3835: probably only be given to addresses with different numbers of registers
                   3836: on machines with lots of registers.
                   3837: 
                   3838: This macro will normally either not be defined or be defined as a
                   3839: constant.
                   3840: 
                   3841: @findex REGISTER_MOVE_COST
                   3842: @item REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{from}, @var{to})
                   3843: A C expression for the cost of moving data from a register in class
                   3844: @var{from} to one in class @var{to}.  The classes are expressed using
                   3845: the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}.  A value of 4 is the
                   3846: default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
                   3847: 
                   3848: It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
                   3849: same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
                   3850: registers if they are not general registers.
                   3851: 
                   3852: If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
                   3853: hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
                   3854: classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
                   3855: constraints of the insn are met.  Setting a cost of other than 2 will
                   3856: allow reload to verify that the constraints are met.  You should do this
                   3857: if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
                   3858: 
                   3859: @findex MEMORY_MOVE_COST
                   3860: @item MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{m})
                   3861: A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{m} between a
                   3862: register and memory.  A value of 2 is the default; this cost is relative
                   3863: to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}.
                   3864: 
                   3865: If moving between registers and memory is more expensive than between
                   3866: two registers, you should define this macro to express the relative cost.
                   3867: 
                   3868: @findex BRANCH_COST
                   3869: @item BRANCH_COST
                   3870: A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction.  A value of 1 is
                   3871: the default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
                   3872: @end table
                   3873: 
                   3874: Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
                   3875: but only that certain actions are more expensive than GNU CC would
                   3876: ordinarily expect.
                   3877: 
                   3878: @table @code
                   3879: @findex SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
                   3880: @item SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
                   3881: Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
                   3882: than a word of memory (i.e. a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
                   3883: faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
                   3884: require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
                   3885: between byte and (aligned) word loads.
                   3886: 
                   3887: When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
                   3888: finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
                   3889: load will be used if alignment permits.  Unless bytes accesses are
                   3890: faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
                   3891: may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
                   3892: other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
                   3893: 
                   3894: @findex SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
                   3895: @item SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
                   3896: Define this macro if zero-extension (of a @code{char} or @code{short}
                   3897: to an @code{int}) can be done faster if the destination is a register
                   3898: that is known to be zero.
                   3899: 
                   3900: If you define this macro, you must have instruction patterns that
                   3901: recognize RTL structures like this:
                   3902: 
                   3903: @smallexample
                   3904: (set (strict_low_part (subreg:QI (reg:SI @dots{}) 0)) @dots{})
                   3905: @end smallexample
                   3906: 
                   3907: @noindent
                   3908: and likewise for @code{HImode}.
                   3909: 
                   3910: @findex SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
                   3911: @item SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
                   3912: Define this macro to be the value 1 if unaligned accesses have a cost
                   3913: many times greater than aligned accesses, for example if they are
                   3914: emulated in a trap handler.
                   3915: 
                   3916: When this macro is non-zero, the compiler will act as if
                   3917: @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were non-zero when generating code for block
                   3918: moves.  This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
                   3919: Therefore, do not set this macro non-zero if unaligned accesses only add a
                   3920: cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
                   3921: 
                   3922: If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined.
                   3923: 
                   3924: @findex DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
                   3925: @item DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
                   3926: Define this macro to inhibit strength reduction of memory addresses.
                   3927: (On some machines, such strength reduction seems to do harm rather
                   3928: than good.)
                   3929: 
                   3930: @findex MOVE_RATIO
                   3931: @item MOVE_RATIO
                   3932: The number of scalar move insns which should be generated instead of a
                   3933: string move insn or a library call.  Increasing the value will always
                   3934: make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
                   3935: 
                   3936: If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
                   3937: 
                   3938: @findex NO_FUNCTION_CSE
                   3939: @item NO_FUNCTION_CSE
                   3940: Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
                   3941: function address than to call an address kept in a register.
                   3942: 
                   3943: @findex NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
                   3944: @item NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
                   3945: Define this macro if it is as good or better for a function to call
                   3946: itself with an explicit address than to call an address kept in a
                   3947: register.
                   3948: 
                   3949: @findex ADJUST_COST
                   3950: @item ADJUST_COST (@var{insn}, @var{link}, @var{dep_insn}, @var{cost})
                   3951: A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer variable @var{cost}
                   3952: based on the relationship between @var{insn} that is dependent on
                   3953: @var{dep_insn} through the dependence @var{link}.  The default is to
                   3954: make no adjustment to @var{cost}.  This can be used for example to
                   3955: specify to the scheduler that an output- or anti-dependence does not
                   3956: incur the same cost as a data-dependence.
                   3957: @end table
                   3958: 
                   3959: @node Sections
                   3960: @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
                   3961: @c the above section title is WAY too long.  maybe cut the part between
                   3962: @c the (...)?  --mew 10feb93
                   3963: 
                   3964: An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
                   3965: data.  In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
                   3966: section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
                   3967: section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
                   3968: section}, which holds uninitialized data.  Some systems have other kinds
                   3969: of sections.
                   3970: 
                   3971: The compiler must tell the assembler when to switch sections.  These
                   3972: macros control what commands to output to tell the assembler this.  You
                   3973: can also define additional sections.
                   3974: 
                   3975: @table @code
                   3976: @findex TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
                   3977: @item TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
                   3978: A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
                   3979: operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.  Normally
                   3980: @code{".text"} is right.
                   3981: 
                   3982: @findex DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
                   3983: @item DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
                   3984: A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
                   3985: operation to identify the following data as writable initialized data.
                   3986: Normally @code{".data"} is right.
                   3987: 
                   3988: @findex SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
                   3989: @item SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
                   3990: if defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
                   3991: assembler operation to identify the following data as shared data.  If
                   3992: not defined, @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP} will be used.
                   3993: 
                   3994: @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
                   3995: @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
                   3996: if defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
                   3997: assembler operation to identify the following data as initialization
                   3998: code.  If not defined, GNU CC will assume such a section does not
                   3999: exist.
                   4000: 
                   4001: @findex EXTRA_SECTIONS
                   4002: @findex in_text
                   4003: @findex in_data
                   4004: @item EXTRA_SECTIONS
                   4005: A list of names for sections other than the standard two, which are
                   4006: @code{in_text} and @code{in_data}.  You need not define this macro
                   4007: on a system with no other sections (that GCC needs to use).
                   4008: 
                   4009: @findex EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
                   4010: @findex text_section
                   4011: @findex data_section
                   4012: @item EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
                   4013: One or more functions to be defined in @file{varasm.c}.  These
                   4014: functions should do jobs analogous to those of @code{text_section} and
                   4015: @code{data_section}, for your additional sections.  Do not define this
                   4016: macro if you do not define @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}.
                   4017: 
                   4018: @findex READONLY_DATA_SECTION
                   4019: @item READONLY_DATA_SECTION
                   4020: On most machines, read-only variables, constants, and jump tables are
                   4021: placed in the text section.  If this is not the case on your machine,
                   4022: this macro should be defined to be the name of a function (either
                   4023: @code{data_section} or a function defined in @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}) that
                   4024: switches to the section to be used for read-only items.
                   4025: 
                   4026: If these items should be placed in the text section, this macro should
                   4027: not be defined.
                   4028: 
                   4029: @findex SELECT_SECTION
                   4030: @item SELECT_SECTION (@var{exp}, @var{reloc})
                   4031: A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
                   4032: output of @var{exp}.  You can assume that @var{exp} is either a
                   4033: @code{VAR_DECL} node or a constant of some sort.  @var{reloc}
                   4034: indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
                   4035: relocations.  Select the section by calling @code{text_section} or one
                   4036: of the alternatives for other sections.
                   4037: 
                   4038: Do not define this macro if you put all read-only variables and
                   4039: constants in the read-only data section (usually the text section).
                   4040: 
                   4041: @findex SELECT_RTX_SECTION
                   4042: @item SELECT_RTX_SECTION (@var{mode}, @var{rtx})
                   4043: A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
                   4044: output of @var{rtx} in mode @var{mode}.  You can assume that @var{rtx}
                   4045: is some kind of constant in RTL.  The argument @var{mode} is redundant
                   4046: except in the case of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Select the section by
                   4047: calling @code{text_section} or one of the alternatives for other
                   4048: sections.
                   4049: 
                   4050: Do not define this macro if you put all constants in the read-only
                   4051: data section.
                   4052: 
                   4053: @findex JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
                   4054: @item JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
                   4055: Define this macro if jump tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be
                   4056: output in the text section, along with the assembler instructions.
                   4057: Otherwise, the readonly data section is used.
                   4058: 
                   4059: This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
                   4060: 
                   4061: @findex ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
                   4062: @item ENCODE_SECTION_INFO (@var{decl})
                   4063: Define this macro if references to a symbol must be treated differently
                   4064: depending on something about the variable or function named by the
                   4065: symbol (such as what section it is in).
                   4066: 
                   4067: The macro definition, if any, is executed immediately after the rtl for
                   4068: @var{decl} has been created and stored in @code{DECL_RTL (@var{decl})}.
                   4069: The value of the rtl will be a @code{mem} whose address is a
                   4070: @code{symbol_ref}.
                   4071: 
                   4072: @cindex @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}, in @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}
                   4073: The usual thing for this macro to do is to record a flag in the
                   4074: @code{symbol_ref} (such as @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}) or to store a
                   4075: modified name string in the @code{symbol_ref} (if one bit is not enough
                   4076: information).
                   4077: 
                   4078: @findex STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
                   4079: @item STRIP_NAME_ENCODING (@var{var}, @var{sym_name})
                   4080: Decode @var{sym_name} and store the real name part in @var{var}, sans
                   4081: the characters that encode section info.  Define this macro if
                   4082: @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} alters the symbol's name string.
                   4083: @end table
                   4084: 
                   4085: @node PIC
                   4086: @section Position Independent Code
                   4087: @cindex position independent code
                   4088: @cindex PIC
                   4089: 
                   4090: This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
                   4091: independent code.  Simply defining these macros is not enough to
                   4092: generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the macros
                   4093: @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as
                   4094: well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}.  You must modify the definition of
                   4095: @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate when the source operand
                   4096: contains a symbolic address.  You may also need to alter the handling of
                   4097: switch statements so that they use relative addresses.
                   4098: @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
                   4099: @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93 
                   4100: 
                   4101: @table @code
                   4102: @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
                   4103: @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
                   4104: The register number of the register used to address a table of static
                   4105: data addresses in memory.  In some cases this register is defined by a
                   4106: processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI).  When this macro
                   4107: is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
                   4108: pointer and frame pointer registers.  If this macro is not defined, it
                   4109: is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
                   4110: necessary).
                   4111: 
                   4112: @findex FINALIZE_PIC
                   4113: @item FINALIZE_PIC
                   4114: By generating position-independent code, when two different programs (A
                   4115: and B) share a common library (libC.a), the text of the library can be
                   4116: shared whether or not the library is linked at the same address for both
                   4117: programs.  In some of these environments, position-independent code
                   4118: requires not only the use of different addressing modes, but also
                   4119: special code to enable the use of these addressing modes.
                   4120: 
                   4121: The @code{FINALIZE_PIC} macro serves as a hook to emit these special
                   4122: codes once the function is being compiled into assembly code, but not
                   4123: before.  (It is not done before, because in the case of compiling an
                   4124: inline function, it would lead to multiple PIC prologues being
                   4125: included in functions which used inline functions and were compiled to
                   4126: assembly language.)
                   4127: 
                   4128: @findex LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
                   4129: @item LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
                   4130: A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
                   4131: operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
                   4132: You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
                   4133: check this.  You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
                   4134: check it either.  You need not define this macro if all constants 
                   4135: (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating 
                   4136: position independent code.
                   4137: @end table
                   4138: 
                   4139: @node Assembler Format
                   4140: @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
                   4141: 
                   4142: This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
                   4143: to write instructions in assembler language--rather than what the
                   4144: instructions do.
                   4145: 
                   4146: @menu
                   4147: * File Framework::       Structural information for the assembler file.
                   4148: * Data Output::          Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
                   4149: * Uninitialized Data::   Output of uninitialized variables.
                   4150: * Label Output::         Output and generation of labels.
                   4151: * Initialization::       General principles of initialization
                   4152:                           and termination routines.
                   4153: * Macros for Initialization::
                   4154:                         Specific macros that control the handling of 
                   4155:                           initialization and termination routines.
                   4156: * Instruction Output::   Output of actual instructions.
                   4157: * Dispatch Tables::      Output of jump tables.
                   4158: * Alignment Output::     Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
                   4159: @end menu
                   4160: 
                   4161: @node File Framework
                   4162: @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File 
                   4163: @cindex assembler format
                   4164: @cindex output of assembler code
                   4165: 
                   4166: @table @code
                   4167: @findex ASM_FILE_START
                   4168: @item ASM_FILE_START (@var{stream})
                   4169: A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
                   4170: some appropriate text to go at the start of an assembler file.
                   4171: 
                   4172: Normally this macro is defined to output a line containing
                   4173: @samp{#NO_APP}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
                   4174: assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it can save time by not
                   4175: checking for certain assembler constructs.
                   4176: 
                   4177: On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
                   4178: see @file{attasm.h}.
                   4179: 
                   4180: @findex ASM_FILE_END
                   4181: @item ASM_FILE_END (@var{stream})
                   4182: A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
                   4183: some appropriate text to go at the end of an assembler file.
                   4184: 
                   4185: If this macro is not defined, the default is to output nothing
                   4186: special at the end of the file.  Most systems don't require any
                   4187: definition.
                   4188: 
                   4189: On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
                   4190: see @file{attasm.h}.
                   4191: 
                   4192: @findex ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC
                   4193: @item ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC (@var{file})
                   4194: A C statement to output assembler commands which will identify
                   4195: the object file as having been compiled with GNU CC (or another
                   4196: GNU compiler).
                   4197: 
                   4198: If you don't define this macro, the string @samp{gcc_compiled.:}
                   4199: is output.  This string is calculated to define a symbol which,
                   4200: on BSD systems, will never be defined for any other reason.
                   4201: GDB checks for the presence of this symbol when reading the
                   4202: symbol table of an executable.
                   4203: 
                   4204: On non-BSD systems, you must arrange communication with GDB in
                   4205: some other fashion.  If GDB is not used on your system, you can
                   4206: define this macro with an empty body.
                   4207: 
                   4208: @findex ASM_COMMENT_START
                   4209: @item ASM_COMMENT_START
                   4210: A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
                   4211: assembler language.  The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
                   4212: the end of the line.
                   4213: 
                   4214: @findex ASM_APP_ON
                   4215: @item ASM_APP_ON
                   4216: A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
                   4217: statement or group of consecutive ones.  Normally this is
                   4218: @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
                   4219: assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
                   4220: that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
                   4221: 
                   4222: @findex ASM_APP_OFF
                   4223: @item ASM_APP_OFF
                   4224: A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
                   4225: statement or group of consecutive ones.  Normally this is
                   4226: @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
                   4227: time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
                   4228: 
                   4229: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
                   4230: @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   4231: A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
                   4232: which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
                   4233: the stdio stream @var{stream}.
                   4234: 
                   4235: This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
                   4236: for the file format in use is appropriate.
                   4237: 
                   4238: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE
                   4239: @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
                   4240: A C statement to output DBX or SDB debugging information before code
                   4241: for line number @var{line} of the current source file to the
                   4242: stdio stream @var{stream}.
                   4243: 
                   4244: This macro need not be defined if the standard form of debugging
                   4245: information for the debugger in use is appropriate.
                   4246: 
                   4247: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
                   4248: @item ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT (@var{stream}, @var{string})
                   4249: A C statement to output something to the assembler file to handle a
                   4250: @samp{#ident} directive containing the text @var{string}.  If this
                   4251: macro is not defined, nothing is output for a @samp{#ident} directive.
                   4252: 
                   4253: @findex OBJC_PROLOGUE
                   4254: @item OBJC_PROLOGUE
                   4255: A C statement to output any assembler statements which are required to
                   4256: precede any Objective C object definitions or message sending.  The
                   4257: statement is executed only when compiling an Objective C program.
                   4258: @end table
                   4259: 
                   4260: @need 2000
                   4261: @node Data Output
                   4262: @subsection Output of Data
                   4263: 
                   4264: @table @code
                   4265: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE
                   4266: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE
                   4267: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT
                   4268: @item ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
                   4269: @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
                   4270: @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
                   4271: A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
                   4272: instruction to assemble a floating-point constant of @code{TFmode},
                   4273: @code{DFmode} or @code{SFmode}, respectively, whose value is
                   4274: @var{value}.  @var{value} will be a C expression of type
                   4275: @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.  Macros such as
                   4276: @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE} are useful for writing these
                   4277: definitions.
                   4278: 
                   4279: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT
                   4280: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT
                   4281: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INT
                   4282: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT
                   4283: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR
                   4284: @findex output_addr_const
                   4285: @item ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
                   4286: @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
                   4287: @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
                   4288: @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
                   4289: @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
                   4290: A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
                   4291: instruction to assemble an integer of 16, 8, 4, 2 or 1 bytes,
                   4292: respectively, whose value is @var{value}.  The argument @var{exp} will
                   4293: be an RTL expression which represents a constant value.  Use
                   4294: @samp{output_addr_const (@var{stream}, @var{exp})} to output this value
                   4295: as an assembler expression.@refill
                   4296: 
                   4297: For sizes larger than @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, if the action of a macro
                   4298: would be identical to repeatedly calling the macro corresponding to
                   4299: a size of @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, once for each word, you need not define
                   4300: the macro.
                   4301: 
                   4302: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE
                   4303: @item ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
                   4304: A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
                   4305: instruction to assemble a single byte containing the number @var{value}.
                   4306: 
                   4307: @findex ASM_BYTE_OP
                   4308: @item ASM_BYTE_OP
                   4309: A C string constant giving the pseudo-op to use for a sequence of
                   4310: single-byte constants.  If this macro is not defined, the default is
                   4311: @code{"byte"}.
                   4312: 
                   4313: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII
                   4314: @item ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
                   4315: A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
                   4316: instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
                   4317: bytes at @var{ptr}.  @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
                   4318: @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
                   4319: 
                   4320: If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
                   4321: Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
                   4322: @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
                   4323: 
                   4324: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE
                   4325: @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
                   4326: A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
                   4327: constant pool for a function.  @var{funname} is a string giving
                   4328: the name of the function.  Should the return type of the function
                   4329: be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}.  @var{size}
                   4330: is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
                   4331: immediately after this call.
                   4332: 
                   4333: If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
                   4334: not be defined.
                   4335: 
                   4336: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY
                   4337: @item ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
                   4338: A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
                   4339: constant pool, if it needs special treatment.  (This macro need not do
                   4340: anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
                   4341: 
                   4342: The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
                   4343: assembler code on.  @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
                   4344: output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
                   4345: @samp{const_int}).  @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
                   4346: @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
                   4347: alignment.
                   4348: 
                   4349: The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
                   4350: the address of this pool entry.  The definition of this macro is
                   4351: responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
                   4352: Here is how to do this:
                   4353: 
                   4354: @example
                   4355: ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
                   4356: @end example
                   4357: 
                   4358: When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
                   4359: @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}.  This will prevent the same pool
                   4360: entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
                   4361: 
                   4362: You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
                   4363: 
                   4364: @findex ASM_OPEN_PAREN
                   4365: @findex ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
                   4366: @item ASM_OPEN_PAREN
                   4367: @itemx ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
                   4368: These macros are defined as C string constant, describing the syntax
                   4369: in the assembler for grouping arithmetic expressions.  The following
                   4370: definitions are correct for most assemblers:
                   4371: 
                   4372: @example
                   4373: #define ASM_OPEN_PAREN "("
                   4374: #define ASM_CLOSE_PAREN ")"
                   4375: @end example
                   4376: @end table
                   4377: 
                   4378:   These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
                   4379: of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
                   4380: 
                   4381: @table @code
                   4382: @item REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
                   4383: @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
                   4384: @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
                   4385: @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE
                   4386: @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE
                   4387: @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE
                   4388: These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the target's
                   4389: floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in the array of
                   4390: @code{long int} whose address is @var{l}.  The number of elements in the
                   4391: output array is determined by the size of the desired target floating
                   4392: point data type: 32 bits of it go in each @code{long int} array
                   4393: element.  Each array element holds 32 bits of the result, even if
                   4394: @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits on the host machine.
                   4395: 
                   4396: The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
                   4397: using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
                   4398: machine's memory.
                   4399: 
                   4400: @item REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL (@var{x}, @var{format}, @var{string})
                   4401: @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL
                   4402: This macro converts @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to a
                   4403: decimal number and stores it as a string into @var{string}.
                   4404: You must pass, as @var{string}, the address of a long enough block
                   4405: of space to hold the result.
                   4406: 
                   4407: The argument @var{format} is a @code{printf}-specification that serves
                   4408: as a suggestion for how to format the output string.
                   4409: @end table
                   4410: 
                   4411: @node Uninitialized Data
                   4412: @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
                   4413: 
                   4414: Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
                   4415: outputting a single uninitialized variable.
                   4416: 
                   4417: @table @code
                   4418: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON
                   4419: @item ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
                   4420: A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
                   4421: @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
                   4422: @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes.  The variable @var{rounded}
                   4423: is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
                   4424: 
                   4425: Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
                   4426: output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
                   4427: assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
                   4428: 
                   4429: This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
                   4430: global variables are output.
                   4431: 
                   4432: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON
                   4433: @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
                   4434: Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
                   4435: separate, explicit argument.  If you define this macro, it is used in
                   4436: place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
                   4437: handling the required alignment of the variable.
                   4438: 
                   4439: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON
                   4440: @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
                   4441: If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, except that it
                   4442: is used when @var{name} is shared.  If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
                   4443: will be used.
                   4444: 
                   4445: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL
                   4446: @item ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
                   4447: A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
                   4448: @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
                   4449: @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes.  The variable @var{rounded}
                   4450: is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
                   4451: 
                   4452: Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
                   4453: output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
                   4454: assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
                   4455: 
                   4456: This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
                   4457: static variables are output.
                   4458: 
                   4459: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL
                   4460: @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
                   4461: Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
                   4462: separate, explicit argument.  If you define this macro, it is used in
                   4463: place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
                   4464: handling the required alignment of the variable.
                   4465: 
                   4466: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL
                   4467: @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
                   4468: If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, except that it
                   4469: is used when @var{name} is shared.  If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}
                   4470: will be used.
                   4471: @end table
                   4472: 
                   4473: @node Label Output
                   4474: @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
                   4475: 
                   4476: @table @code
                   4477: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL
                   4478: @findex assemble_name
                   4479: @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   4480: A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
                   4481: @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
                   4482: Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
                   4483: output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
                   4484: assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
                   4485: 
                   4486: @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME
                   4487: @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
                   4488: A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
                   4489: @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
                   4490: function which is being defined.  This macro is responsible for
                   4491: outputting the label definition (perhaps using
                   4492: @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).  The argument @var{decl} is the
                   4493: @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
                   4494: 
                   4495: If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
                   4496: usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
                   4497: 
                   4498: @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE
                   4499: @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
                   4500: A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
                   4501: @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
                   4502: which is being defined.  The argument @var{name} is the name of the
                   4503: function.  The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
                   4504: representing the function.
                   4505: 
                   4506: If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
                   4507: 
                   4508: @findex ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME
                   4509: @item ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
                   4510: A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
                   4511: @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
                   4512: initialized variable which is being defined.  This macro must output the
                   4513: label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).  The argument
                   4514: @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
                   4515: 
                   4516: If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
                   4517: usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
                   4518: 
                   4519: @findex  ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT
                   4520: @item ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
                   4521: A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
                   4522: once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
                   4523: chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
                   4524: initializer.  This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
                   4525: something about the size of the object.
                   4526: 
                   4527: If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
                   4528: nothing.
                   4529: 
                   4530: @findex ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
                   4531: @item ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   4532: A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
                   4533: @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} global;
                   4534: that is, available for reference from other files.  Use the expression
                   4535: @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
                   4536: itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
                   4537: for making that name global, and a newline.
                   4538: 
                   4539: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL
                   4540: @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
                   4541: A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
                   4542: @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
                   4543: symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
                   4544: not defined.  The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
                   4545: declaration.
                   4546: 
                   4547: This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
                   4548: The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
                   4549: 
                   4550: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
                   4551: @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL (@var{stream}, @var{symref})
                   4552: A C statement (sans semicolon) to output on @var{stream} an assembler
                   4553: pseudo-op to declare a library function name external.  The name of the
                   4554: library function is given by @var{symref}, which has type @code{rtx} and
                   4555: is a @code{symbol_ref}.
                   4556: 
                   4557: This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
                   4558: The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
                   4559: 
                   4560: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF
                   4561: @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   4562: A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
                   4563: @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
                   4564: @var{name}.  This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
                   4565: is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
                   4566: systems.  This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
                   4567: 
                   4568: @ignore @c Seems not to exist anymore.
                   4569: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT
                   4570: @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT (@var{file}, @var{label})
                   4571: Define this macro for systems that use the program @code{collect2}.
                   4572: The definition should be a C statement to output a word containing
                   4573: a reference to the label @var{label}.
                   4574: @end ignore
                   4575: 
                   4576: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL
                   4577: @item ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
                   4578: A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a label whose
                   4579: name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
                   4580: 
                   4581: It is absolutely essential that these labels be distinct from the labels
                   4582: used for user-level functions and variables.  Otherwise, certain programs
                   4583: will have name conflicts with internal labels.
                   4584: 
                   4585: It is desirable to exclude internal labels from the symbol table of the
                   4586: object file.  Most assemblers have a naming convention for labels that
                   4587: should be excluded; on many systems, the letter @samp{L} at the
                   4588: beginning of a label has this effect.  You should find out what
                   4589: convention your system uses, and follow it.
                   4590: 
                   4591: The usual definition of this macro is as follows:
                   4592: 
                   4593: @example
                   4594: fprintf (@var{stream}, "L%s%d:\n", @var{prefix}, @var{num})
                   4595: @end example
                   4596: 
                   4597: @findex ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL
                   4598: @item ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
                   4599: A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
                   4600: is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
                   4601: 
                   4602: This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
                   4603: produce the output that @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL} would produce
                   4604: with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
                   4605: 
                   4606: If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
                   4607: output the rest of the string unchanged.  It is often convenient for
                   4608: @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way.  If the
                   4609: string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
                   4610: to output the string, and may change it.  (Of course,
                   4611: @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
                   4612: you should know what it does on your machine.)
                   4613: 
                   4614: @findex ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME
                   4615: @item ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
                   4616: A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
                   4617: @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
                   4618: @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
                   4619: added.  Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
                   4620: 
                   4621: The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
                   4622: produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
                   4623: @var{name}.  Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
                   4624: assembler code.  The argument @var{number} is different each time this
                   4625: macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
                   4626: internal static variables in different scopes.
                   4627: 
                   4628: Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
                   4629: conflict with the user's own symbols.  Most assemblers allow periods
                   4630: or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
                   4631: between the name and the number will suffice.
                   4632: 
                   4633: @findex OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL
                   4634: @item OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
                   4635: Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
                   4636: Objective C methods.
                   4637: 
                   4638: The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
                   4639: class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}).  For methods in categories, the name of
                   4640: the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
                   4641: @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
                   4642: 
                   4643: These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
                   4644: the method's selector is not present in the name.  Therefore, particular
                   4645: systems define other ways of computing names.
                   4646: 
                   4647: @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
                   4648: buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
                   4649: @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
                   4650: 50 characters extra.
                   4651: 
                   4652: The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
                   4653: method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
                   4654: @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or NULL if the method is not
                   4655: in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
                   4656: 
                   4657: On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
                   4658: macro to provide more human-readable names.
                   4659: @end table
                   4660: 
                   4661: @node Initialization
                   4662: @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
                   4663: @cindex initialization routines
                   4664: @cindex termination routines
                   4665: @cindex constructors, output of
                   4666: @cindex destructors, output of
                   4667: 
                   4668: The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
                   4669: (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
                   4670: data in the program when the program is started.  These functions need
                   4671: to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
                   4672: @code{main} is called.
                   4673: 
                   4674: Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
                   4675: @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
                   4676: terminates.
                   4677: 
                   4678: To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
                   4679: must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
                   4680: be called at the appropriate time.  When you port the compiler to a new
                   4681: system, you need to specify how to do this.
                   4682: 
                   4683: There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
                   4684: initialization and termination functions.  Each way has two variants.
                   4685: Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
                   4686: 
                   4687: @findex __CTOR_LIST__
                   4688: @findex __DTOR_LIST__
                   4689: The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
                   4690: initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
                   4691: termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
                   4692: 
                   4693: Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
                   4694: 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
                   4695: the environment).  This is followed by a series of zero or more function
                   4696: pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
                   4697: pointer containing zero.
                   4698: 
                   4699: Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
                   4700: @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
                   4701: time and exit time.  Constructors are called in forward order of the
                   4702: list; destructors in reverse order.
                   4703: 
                   4704: The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
                   4705: formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections.  A section is set
                   4706: aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
                   4707: Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}.  Each
                   4708: object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
                   4709: the constructor section to point to that function.  The linker
                   4710: accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
                   4711: Termination functions are handled similarly.
                   4712: 
                   4713: To use this method, you need appropriate definitions of the macros
                   4714: @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}.  Usually
                   4715: you can get them by including @file{svr4.h}.
                   4716: 
                   4717: When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
                   4718: upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called.  On systems that
                   4719: support an @dfn{init} section which is executed at program startup,
                   4720: parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section.  The
                   4721: program is linked by the @code{gcc} driver like this:
                   4722: 
                   4723: @example
                   4724: ld -o @var{output_file} crtbegin.o @dots{} crtend.o -lgcc
                   4725: @end example
                   4726: 
                   4727: The head of a function (@code{__do_global_ctors}) appears in the init
                   4728: section of @file{crtbegin.o}; the remainder of the function appears in
                   4729: the init section of @file{crtend.o}.  The linker will pull these two
                   4730: parts of the section together, making a whole function.  If any of the
                   4731: user's object files linked into the middle of it contribute code, then that
                   4732: code will be executed as part of the body of @code{__do_global_ctors}.
                   4733: 
                   4734: To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
                   4735: macro properly.
                   4736: 
                   4737: If no init section is available, do not define
                   4738: @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.  Then @code{__do_global_ctors} is built into
                   4739: the text section like all other functions, and resides in
                   4740: @file{libgcc.a}.  When GCC compiles any function called @code{main}, it
                   4741: inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
                   4742: after the function prologue.  The @code{__main} function, also defined
                   4743: in @file{libgcc2.c}, simply calls @file{__do_global_ctors}.
                   4744: 
                   4745: In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
                   4746: two variants.  In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
                   4747: and an `a.out' format must be used.  In this case,
                   4748: @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
                   4749: entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
                   4750: and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
                   4751: code as its value.  The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
                   4752: the value to a ``set''; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
                   4753: placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
                   4754: a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
                   4755: @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly.  Since no init
                   4756: section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
                   4757: the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
                   4758: the initialization process.
                   4759: 
                   4760: The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
                   4761: This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
                   4762: file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'.  In
                   4763: this case, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} does not produce an
                   4764: @code{N_SETT} symbol; initialization and termination functions are
                   4765: recognized simply by their names.  This requires an extra program in the
                   4766: linkage step, called @code{collect2}.  This program pretends to be the
                   4767: linker, for use with GNU CC; it does its job by running the ordinary
                   4768: linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of initialization and
                   4769: termination functions.  These functions are called via @code{__main} as
                   4770: described above.
                   4771: 
                   4772: Choosing among these configuration options has been simplified by a set
                   4773: of operating-system-dependent files in the @file{config} subdirectory.
                   4774: These files define all of the relevant parameters.  Usually it is
                   4775: sufficient to include one into your specific machine-dependent
                   4776: configuration file.  These files are:
                   4777: 
                   4778: @table @file
                   4779: @item aoutos.h
                   4780: For operating systems using the `a.out' format.
                   4781: 
                   4782: @item next.h
                   4783: For operating systems using the `MachO' format.
                   4784: 
                   4785: @item svr3.h
                   4786: For System V Release 3 and similar systems using `COFF' format.
                   4787: 
                   4788: @item svr4.h
                   4789: For System V Release 4 and similar systems using `ELF' format.
                   4790: 
                   4791: @item vms.h
                   4792: For the VMS operating system.
                   4793: @end table
                   4794: 
                   4795: @ifinfo
                   4796: The following section describes the specific macros that control and
                   4797: customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
                   4798: @end ifinfo
                   4799: 
                   4800: @node Macros for Initialization
                   4801: @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
                   4802: 
                   4803: Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
                   4804: and termination functions:
                   4805: 
                   4806: @table @code
                   4807: @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
                   4808: @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
                   4809: If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to identify
                   4810: the following data as initialization code.  If not defined, GNU CC will
                   4811: assume such a section does not exist.  When you are using special
                   4812: sections for initialization and termination functions, this macro also
                   4813: controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to run the
                   4814: initialization functions.
                   4815: 
                   4816: @item ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   4817: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR
                   4818: Define this macro as a C statement to output on the stream @var{stream}
                   4819: the assembler code to arrange to call the function named @var{name} at
                   4820: initialization time.
                   4821: 
                   4822: Assume that @var{name} is the name of a C function generated
                   4823: automatically by the compiler.  This function takes no arguments.  Use
                   4824: the function @code{assemble_name} to output the name @var{name}; this
                   4825: performs any system-specific syntactic transformations such as adding an
                   4826: underscore.
                   4827: 
                   4828: If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output to arrange to
                   4829: call the function.  This is correct when the function will be called in
                   4830: some other manner---for example, by means of the @code{collect2} program,
                   4831: which looks through the symbol table to find these functions by their
                   4832: names.
                   4833: 
                   4834: @item ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   4835: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR
                   4836: This is like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} but used for termination
                   4837: functions rather than initialization functions.
                   4838: @end table
                   4839: 
                   4840: If your system uses @code{collect2} as the means of processing
                   4841: constructors, then that program normally uses @code{nm} to scan an
                   4842: object file for constructor functions to be called.  On certain kinds of
                   4843: systems, you can define these macros to make @code{collect2} work faster
                   4844: (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
                   4845: 
                   4846: @table @code
                   4847: @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
                   4848: @item OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
                   4849: Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
                   4850: object files, so that @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan
                   4851: object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
                   4852: 
                   4853: @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
                   4854: @item OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
                   4855: Define this macro if the system uses ROSE format object files, so that
                   4856: @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan object files directly
                   4857: for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
                   4858: @end table
                   4859: 
                   4860: These macros are effective only in a native compiler; @code{collect2} as
                   4861: part of a cross compiler always uses @code{nm}.
                   4862: 
                   4863: @table @code
                   4864: @findex REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
                   4865: @item REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
                   4866: Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
                   4867: to execute @code{nm}.  The default is to search the path normally for
                   4868: @code{nm}.
                   4869: @end table
                   4870: 
                   4871: @node Instruction Output
                   4872: @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
                   4873: 
                   4874: @table @code
                   4875: @findex REGISTER_NAMES
                   4876: @item REGISTER_NAMES
                   4877: A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
                   4878: registers, each one as a C string constant.  This is what translates
                   4879: register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
                   4880: 
                   4881: @findex ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
                   4882: @item ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
                   4883: If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
                   4884: and a register number.  This macro defines additional names for hard
                   4885: registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
                   4886: to registers using alternate names.
                   4887: 
                   4888: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE
                   4889: @item ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
                   4890: Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
                   4891: requires different names for the machine instructions.
                   4892: 
                   4893: The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
                   4894: assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}.  The
                   4895: macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
                   4896: points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
                   4897: written in the machine description.  The definition should output the
                   4898: opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
                   4899: increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
                   4900: so that it will not be output twice.
                   4901: 
                   4902: In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
                   4903: name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
                   4904: that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
                   4905: care of the substitution yourself.  Just be sure to increment
                   4906: @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
                   4907: 
                   4908: @findex recog_operand
                   4909: If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
                   4910: elements of @code{recog_operand}.
                   4911: 
                   4912: If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
                   4913: in the usual way.
                   4914: 
                   4915: @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN
                   4916: @item FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
                   4917: If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
                   4918: assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
                   4919: they will be output differently.
                   4920: 
                   4921: Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
                   4922: extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
                   4923: elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
                   4924: The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
                   4925: template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
                   4926: by changing the contents of the vector.
                   4927: 
                   4928: This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
                   4929: file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
                   4930: can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
                   4931: as with rearranged operands).  Naturally, variations in assembler
                   4932: syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
                   4933: writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
                   4934: 
                   4935: If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
                   4936: 
                   4937: @findex PRINT_OPERAND
                   4938: @item PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
                   4939: A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
                   4940: assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}.  @var{x} is an
                   4941: RTL expression.
                   4942: 
                   4943: @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
                   4944: of printing the operand.  It is used when identical operands must be
                   4945: printed differently depending on the context.  @var{code} comes from
                   4946: the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
                   4947: operand.  If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
                   4948: @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
                   4949: @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
                   4950: 
                   4951: @findex reg_names
                   4952: If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
                   4953: The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
                   4954: @code{char *[]}.  @code{reg_names} is initialized from
                   4955: @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
                   4956: 
                   4957: When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
                   4958: (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
                   4959: with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
                   4960: @var{code}.
                   4961: 
                   4962: @findex PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P
                   4963: @item PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
                   4964: A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
                   4965: punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro.  If
                   4966: @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
                   4967: punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
                   4968: in this way.
                   4969: 
                   4970: @findex PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS
                   4971: @item PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
                   4972: A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
                   4973: assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
                   4974: whose address is @var{x}.  @var{x} is an RTL expression.
                   4975: 
                   4976: @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
                   4977: On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
                   4978: section that the address refers to.  On these machines, define the macro
                   4979: @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
                   4980: @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here.  @xref{Assembler Format}.
                   4981: 
                   4982: @findex DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND
                   4983: @findex dbr_sequence_length
                   4984: @item DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND(@var{file})
                   4985: A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
                   4986: been output.  If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
                   4987: determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
                   4988: currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
                   4989: or whatever.
                   4990: 
                   4991: Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
                   4992: reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
                   4993: explicit (e.g. with white space).
                   4994: 
                   4995: @findex final_sequence
                   4996: Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
                   4997: prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence (i.e.
                   4998: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
                   4999: found.)  The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
                   5000: processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
                   5001: being output.
                   5002: 
                   5003: @findex REGISTER_PREFIX
                   5004: @findex LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
                   5005: @findex USER_LABEL_PREFIX
                   5006: @findex IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
                   5007: @findex asm_fprintf
                   5008: @item REGISTER_PREFIX
                   5009: @itemx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
                   5010: @itemx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
                   5011: @itemx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
                   5012: If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
                   5013: @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
                   5014: @file{final.c}).  These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
                   5015: support multiple assembler formats.  In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
                   5016: files can define these macros differently.
                   5017: 
                   5018: @findex ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
                   5019: @item ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
                   5020: If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
                   5021: different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
                   5022: numeric index of the assembler langauge dialect to use, with zero as the
                   5023: first variant.
                   5024: 
                   5025: If this macro is defined, you may use
                   5026: @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}} constructs in the output
                   5027: templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the first argument
                   5028: of @code{asm_fprintf}.  This construct outputs @samp{option0},
                   5029: @samp{option1} or @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
                   5030: @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one or two, etc.  Any special
                   5031: characters within these strings retain their usual meaning.
                   5032: 
                   5033: If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
                   5034: @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
                   5035: operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
                   5036: 
                   5037: Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
                   5038: @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
                   5039: the variations in assemble language syntax with that mechanism.  Define
                   5040: @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
                   5041: if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
                   5042: opcodes or operand order.
                   5043: 
                   5044: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH
                   5045: @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
                   5046: A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
                   5047: which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
                   5048: The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
                   5049: profiling.
                   5050: 
                   5051: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP
                   5052: @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
                   5053: A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
                   5054: which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
                   5055: The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
                   5056: profiling.
                   5057: @end table
                   5058: 
                   5059: @node Dispatch Tables
                   5060: @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
                   5061: 
                   5062: @table @code
                   5063: @cindex dispatch table
                   5064: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
                   5065: @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
                   5066: This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
                   5067: in a dispatch table are relative to the table's own address.
                   5068: 
                   5069: The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
                   5070: @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a difference
                   5071: between two labels.  @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two
                   5072: internal labels.  The definitions of these labels are output using
                   5073: @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}, and they must be printed in the same
                   5074: way here.  For example,
                   5075: 
                   5076: @example
                   5077: fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
                   5078:          @var{value}, @var{rel})
                   5079: @end example
                   5080: 
                   5081: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
                   5082: @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
                   5083: This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
                   5084: in a dispatch table are absolute.
                   5085: 
                   5086: The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
                   5087: @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
                   5088: a label.  @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
                   5089: definition is output using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
                   5090: For example,
                   5091: 
                   5092: @example
                   5093: fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
                   5094: @end example
                   5095: 
                   5096: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
                   5097: @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
                   5098: Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
                   5099: specially.  The first three arguments are the same as for
                   5100: @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}; the fourth argument is the
                   5101: jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_insn} containing an
                   5102: @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
                   5103: 
                   5104: This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
                   5105: for the table.
                   5106: 
                   5107: If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
                   5108: @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
                   5109: 
                   5110: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END
                   5111: @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
                   5112: Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
                   5113: jump-table.  The definition should be a C statement to be executed
                   5114: after the assembler code for the table is written.  It should write
                   5115: the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}.  The argument
                   5116: @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
                   5117: of the preceding label.
                   5118: 
                   5119: If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
                   5120: the jump-table.
                   5121: @end table
                   5122: 
                   5123: @node Alignment Output
                   5124: @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
                   5125: 
                   5126: @table @code
                   5127: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_CODE
                   5128: @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_CODE (@var{file})
                   5129: A C expression to output text to align the location counter in the way
                   5130: that is desirable at a point in the code that is reached only by
                   5131: jumping.
                   5132: 
                   5133: This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
                   5134: to be done at such a time.  Most machine descriptions do not currently
                   5135: define the macro.
                   5136: 
                   5137: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LOOP_ALIGN
                   5138: @item ASM_OUTPUT_LOOP_ALIGN (@var{file})
                   5139: A C expression to output text to align the location counter in the way
                   5140: that is desirable at the beginning of a loop.
                   5141: 
                   5142: This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
                   5143: to be done at such a time.  Most machine descriptions do not currently
                   5144: define the macro.
                   5145: 
                   5146: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP
                   5147: @item ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
                   5148: A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
                   5149: instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
                   5150: Those bytes should be zero when loaded.  @var{nbytes} will be a C
                   5151: expression of type @code{int}.
                   5152: 
                   5153: @findex ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
                   5154: @item ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
                   5155: Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
                   5156: text section because it fails put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
                   5157: This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
                   5158: produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
                   5159: section.
                   5160: 
                   5161: @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN
                   5162: @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
                   5163: A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
                   5164: command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
                   5165: @var{power} bytes.  @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
                   5166: @end table
                   5167: 
                   5168: @need 3000
                   5169: @node Debugging Info
                   5170: @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
                   5171: @c this should have some text in here....  --mew 10feb93
                   5172: 
                   5173: @menu
                   5174: * All Debuggers::      Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
                   5175: * DBX Options::        Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
                   5176: * DBX Hooks::          Hook macros for varying DBX format.
                   5177: * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
                   5178: * SDB and DWARF::      Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
                   5179: @end menu
                   5180: 
                   5181: @node All Debuggers
                   5182: @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
                   5183: 
                   5184: @table @code
                   5185: @findex DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER
                   5186: @item DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
                   5187: A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
                   5188: register number @var{regno}.  In simple cases, the value of this
                   5189: expression may be @var{regno} itself.  But sometimes there are some
                   5190: registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
                   5191: versa.  In such cases, some register may need to have one number in
                   5192: the compiler and another for DBX.
                   5193: 
                   5194: If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GNU CC, and they can be
                   5195: used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
                   5196: consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
                   5197: Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
                   5198: expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
                   5199: 
                   5200: If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
                   5201: does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
                   5202: redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
                   5203: 
                   5204: @findex DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET
                   5205: @item DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
                   5206: A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
                   5207: variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression).  The default
                   5208: computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
                   5209: gives the offset from the frame-pointer.  This is required for targets
                   5210: that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
                   5211: for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
                   5212: @samp{-g} options is used.
                   5213: 
                   5214: @findex DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET
                   5215: @item DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
                   5216: A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
                   5217: having address @var{x} (an RTL expression).  The nominal offset is
                   5218: @var{offset}.
                   5219: 
                   5220: @findex PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
                   5221: @item PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
                   5222: A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GNU CC produces
                   5223: when the user specifies @samp{-g} or @samp{-ggdb}.  Define this if you
                   5224: have arranged for GNU CC to support more than one format of debugging
                   5225: output.  Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
                   5226: @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, and @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}.
                   5227: 
                   5228: The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
                   5229: user can always get a specific type of output by using @samp{-gstabs},
                   5230: @samp{-gcoff}, @samp{-gdwarf}, or @samp{-gxcoff}.
                   5231: @end table
                   5232: 
                   5233: @node DBX Options
                   5234: @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
                   5235: 
                   5236: @table @code
                   5237: @findex DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
                   5238: @item DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
                   5239: Define this macro if GNU CC should produce debugging output for DBX
                   5240: in response to the @samp{-g} option.
                   5241: 
                   5242: @findex XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
                   5243: @item XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
                   5244: Define this macro if GNU CC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
                   5245: in response to the @samp{-g} option.  This is a variant of DBX format.
                   5246: 
                   5247: @findex DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
                   5248: @item DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
                   5249: Define this macro to control whether GNU CC should by default generate
                   5250: GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
                   5251: debugging information is enabled at all).  If you don't define the
                   5252: macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
                   5253: if there is any occasion to.
                   5254: 
                   5255: @findex DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
                   5256: @item DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
                   5257: Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
                   5258: in the text section.
                   5259: 
                   5260: @findex ASM_STABS_OP
                   5261: @item ASM_STABS_OP
                   5262: A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
                   5263: @code{.stabs} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.  If you don't
                   5264: define this macro, @code{.stabs} is used.  This macro applies only to
                   5265: DBX debugging information format.
                   5266: 
                   5267: @findex ASM_STABD_OP
                   5268: @item ASM_STABD_OP
                   5269: A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
                   5270: @code{.stabd} to define a debugging symbol whose value is the current
                   5271: location.  If you don't define this macro, @code{.stabd} is used.
                   5272: This macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
                   5273: 
                   5274: @findex ASM_STABN_OP
                   5275: @item ASM_STABN_OP
                   5276: A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
                   5277: @code{.stabn} to define a debugging symbol with no name.  If you don't
                   5278: define this macro, @code{.stabn} is used.  This macro applies only to
                   5279: DBX debugging information format.
                   5280: 
                   5281: @findex DBX_NO_XREFS
                   5282: @item DBX_NO_XREFS
                   5283: Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
                   5284: @samp{xs@var{tagname}}.  On some systems, this construct is used to
                   5285: describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
                   5286: On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
                   5287: 
                   5288: @findex DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
                   5289: @item DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
                   5290: A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
                   5291: continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
                   5292: exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters).  On some
                   5293: operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
                   5294: must not be done.  You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
                   5295: with the value zero.  You can override the default splitting-length by
                   5296: defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
                   5297: 
                   5298: @findex DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
                   5299: @item DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
                   5300: Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
                   5301: the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows.  To use
                   5302: a different character instead, define this macro as a character
                   5303: constant for the character you want to use.  Do not define this macro
                   5304: if backslash is correct for your system.
                   5305: 
                   5306: @findex DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
                   5307: @item DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
                   5308: Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
                   5309: outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
                   5310: variable.
                   5311: 
                   5312: @findex DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
                   5313: @item DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
                   5314: The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
                   5315: for a typedef.  The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
                   5316: 
                   5317: @findex DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
                   5318: @item DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
                   5319: The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
                   5320: for a static variable located in the text section.  DBX format does not
                   5321: provide any ``right'' way to do this.  The default is @code{N_FUN}.
                   5322: 
                   5323: @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
                   5324: @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
                   5325: The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
                   5326: for a parameter passed in registers.  DBX format does not provide any
                   5327: ``right'' way to do this.  The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
                   5328: 
                   5329: @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
                   5330: @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
                   5331: The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
                   5332: passed in registers.  DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
                   5333: do this.  The default is @code{'P'}.
                   5334: 
                   5335: @findex DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
                   5336: @item DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
                   5337: The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a stack
                   5338: parameter.  The default is @code{'p'}.
                   5339: 
                   5340: @findex DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
                   5341: @item DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
                   5342: Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
                   5343: arguments should precede the assembler code for the function.  Normally,
                   5344: in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
                   5345: code.
                   5346: 
                   5347: @findex DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
                   5348: @item DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
                   5349: Define this macro if the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol for a block should
                   5350: precede the debugging information for variables and functions defined in
                   5351: that block.  Normally, in DBX format, the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol comes
                   5352: first.
                   5353: @end table
                   5354: 
                   5355: @node DBX Hooks
                   5356: @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
                   5357: 
                   5358: @table @code
                   5359: @findex DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC
                   5360: @item DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   5361: Define this macro to say how to output to @var{stream} the debugging
                   5362: information for the start of a scope level for variable names.  The
                   5363: argument @var{name} is the name of an assembler symbol (for use with
                   5364: @code{assemble_name}) whose value is the address where the scope begins.
                   5365: 
                   5366: @findex DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC
                   5367: @item DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   5368: Like @code{DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC}, but for the end of a scope level.
                   5369: 
                   5370: @findex DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM
                   5371: @item DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM (@var{stream}, @var{type})
                   5372: Define this macro if the target machine requires special handling to
                   5373: output an enumeration type.  The definition should be a C statement
                   5374: (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information to @var{stream}
                   5375: for the type @var{type}.
                   5376: 
                   5377: @findex DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END
                   5378: @item DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END (@var{stream}, @var{function})
                   5379: Define this macro if the target machine requires special output at the
                   5380: end of the debugging information for a function.  The definition should
                   5381: be a C statement (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information
                   5382: to @var{stream}.  @var{function} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node for
                   5383: the function.
                   5384: 
                   5385: @findex DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES
                   5386: @item DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES (@var{syms})
                   5387: Define this macro if you need to control the order of output of the
                   5388: standard data types at the beginning of compilation.  The argument
                   5389: @var{syms} is a @code{tree} which is a chain of all the predefined
                   5390: global symbols, including names of data types.
                   5391: 
                   5392: Normally, DBX output starts with definitions of the types for integers
                   5393: and characters, followed by all the other predefined types of the
                   5394: particular language in no particular order.
                   5395: 
                   5396: On some machines, it is necessary to output different particular types
                   5397: first.  To do this, define @code{DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES} to output
                   5398: those symbols in the necessary order.  Any predefined types that you
                   5399: don't explicitly output will be output afterward in no particular order.
                   5400: 
                   5401: Be careful not to define this macro so that it works only for C.  There
                   5402: are no global variables to access most of the built-in types, because
                   5403: another language may have another set of types.  The way to output a
                   5404: particular type is to look through @var{syms} to see if you can find it.
                   5405: Here is an example:
                   5406: 
                   5407: @smallexample
                   5408: @{
                   5409:   tree decl;
                   5410:   for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
                   5411:     if (!strcmp (IDENTIFIER_POINTER (DECL_NAME (decl)),
                   5412:                  "long int"))
                   5413:       dbxout_symbol (decl);
                   5414:   @dots{}
                   5415: @}
                   5416: @end smallexample
                   5417: 
                   5418: @noindent
                   5419: This does nothing if the expected type does not exist.
                   5420: 
                   5421: See the function @code{init_decl_processing} in @file{c-decl.c} to find
                   5422: the names to use for all the built-in C types.
                   5423: 
                   5424: Here is another way of finding a particular type:
                   5425: 
                   5426: @c this is still overfull.  --mew 10feb93
                   5427: @smallexample
                   5428: @{
                   5429:   tree decl;
                   5430:   for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
                   5431:     if (TREE_CODE (decl) == TYPE_DECL
                   5432:         && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (decl))
                   5433:             == INTEGER_CST)
                   5434:         && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (decl)) == 16
                   5435:         && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (decl)))
                   5436: @group
                   5437:       /* @r{This must be @code{unsigned short}.}  */
                   5438:       dbxout_symbol (decl);
                   5439:   @dots{}
                   5440: @}
                   5441: @end group
                   5442: @end smallexample
                   5443: @end table
                   5444: 
                   5445: @node File Names and DBX
                   5446: @subsection File Names in DBX Format
                   5447: 
                   5448: @table @code
                   5449: @findex DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
                   5450: @item DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
                   5451: Define this if DBX wants to have the current directory recorded in each
                   5452: object file.
                   5453: 
                   5454: Note that the working directory is always recorded if GDB extensions are
                   5455: enabled.
                   5456: 
                   5457: @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME
                   5458: @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   5459: A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
                   5460: @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
                   5461: file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
                   5462: This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
                   5463: 
                   5464: This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
                   5465: for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
                   5466: 
                   5467: @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
                   5468: @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   5469: A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
                   5470: @var{stream} which indicates that the current directory during
                   5471: compilation is named @var{name}.
                   5472: 
                   5473: This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
                   5474: for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
                   5475: 
                   5476: @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
                   5477: @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   5478: A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
                   5479: compilation of the main source file @var{name}.
                   5480: 
                   5481: If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
                   5482: of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
                   5483: 
                   5484: @findex DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
                   5485: @item DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
                   5486: A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
                   5487: @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the current source
                   5488: file.  This output is generated each time input shifts to a different
                   5489: source file as a result of @samp{#include}, the end of an included file,
                   5490: or a @samp{#line} command.
                   5491: 
                   5492: This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
                   5493: for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
                   5494: @end table
                   5495: 
                   5496: @need 2000
                   5497: @node SDB and DWARF
                   5498: @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
                   5499: 
                   5500: @table @code
                   5501: @findex SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
                   5502: @item SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
                   5503: Define this macro if GNU CC should produce COFF-style debugging output
                   5504: for SDB in response to the @samp{-g} option.
                   5505: 
                   5506: @findex DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
                   5507: @item DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
                   5508: Define this macro if GNU CC should produce dwarf format debugging output 
                   5509: in response to the @samp{-g} option.
                   5510: 
                   5511: @findex PUT_SDB_@dots{}
                   5512: @item PUT_SDB_@dots{}
                   5513: Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
                   5514: SDB assembler directives.  See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
                   5515: macros and their arguments.  If the standard syntax is used, you need
                   5516: not define them yourself.
                   5517: 
                   5518: @findex SDB_DELIM
                   5519: @item SDB_DELIM
                   5520: Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
                   5521: SDB assembler directives.  In that case, define this macro to be the
                   5522: delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}).  It is not necessary to define
                   5523: a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
                   5524: required.
                   5525: 
                   5526: @findex SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
                   5527: @item SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
                   5528: Define this macro to override the usual method of constructing a dummy
                   5529: name for anonymous structure and union types.  See @file{sdbout.c} for
                   5530: more information.
                   5531: 
                   5532: @findex SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
                   5533: @item SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
                   5534: Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
                   5535: union, or enumeration tags to be emitted.  Standard COFF does not
                   5536: allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
                   5537: it.
                   5538: 
                   5539: @findex SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
                   5540: @item SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
                   5541: Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
                   5542: enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled.  Some
                   5543: assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
                   5544: @end table
                   5545: 
                   5546: @node Cross-compilation
                   5547: @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
                   5548: @cindex cross compilation and floating point 
                   5549: @cindex floating point and cross compilation
                   5550: 
                   5551: While all modern machines use 2's complement representation for integers,
                   5552: there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers.  This
                   5553: means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
                   5554: in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
                   5555: doing the compilation.
                   5556: 
                   5557: @findex atof
                   5558: Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
                   5559: range and precision, the cross compiler cannot safely use the host
                   5560: machine's floating point arithmetic.  Therefore, floating point constants
                   5561: must be represented in the target machine's format.  This means that the
                   5562: cross compiler cannot use @code{atof} to parse a floating point constant;
                   5563: it must have its own special routine to use instead.  Also, constant
                   5564: folding must emulate the target machine's arithmetic (or must not be done
                   5565: at all).
                   5566: 
                   5567: The macros in the following table should be defined only if you are cross
                   5568: compiling between different floating point formats.
                   5569: 
                   5570: Otherwise, don't define them.  Then default definitions will be set up which
                   5571: use @code{double} as the data type, @code{==} to test for equality, etc.
                   5572: 
                   5573: You don't need to worry about how many times you use an operand of any
                   5574: of these macros.  The compiler never uses operands which have side effects.
                   5575: 
                   5576: @table @code
                   5577: @findex REAL_VALUE_TYPE
                   5578: @item REAL_VALUE_TYPE
                   5579: A macro for the C data type to be used to hold a floating point value
                   5580: in the target machine's format.  Typically this would be a
                   5581: @code{struct} containing an array of @code{int}.
                   5582: 
                   5583: @findex REAL_VALUES_EQUAL
                   5584: @item REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (@var{x}, @var{y})
                   5585: A macro for a C expression which compares for equality the two values,
                   5586: @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
                   5587: 
                   5588: @findex REAL_VALUES_LESS
                   5589: @item REAL_VALUES_LESS (@var{x}, @var{y})
                   5590: A macro for a C expression which tests whether @var{x} is less than
                   5591: @var{y}, both values being of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and
                   5592: interpreted as floating point numbers in the target machine's
                   5593: representation.
                   5594: 
                   5595: @findex REAL_VALUE_LDEXP
                   5596: @findex ldexp
                   5597: @item REAL_VALUE_LDEXP (@var{x}, @var{scale})
                   5598: A macro for a C expression which performs the standard library
                   5599: function @code{ldexp}, but using the target machine's floating point
                   5600: representation.  Both @var{x} and the value of the expression have
                   5601: type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.  The second argument, @var{scale}, is an
                   5602: integer.
                   5603: 
                   5604: @findex REAL_VALUE_FIX
                   5605: @item REAL_VALUE_FIX (@var{x})
                   5606: A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
                   5607: floating point value @var{x} to a signed integer.  @var{x} has type
                   5608: @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
                   5609: 
                   5610: @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX
                   5611: @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (@var{x})
                   5612: A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
                   5613: floating point value @var{x} to an unsigned integer.  @var{x} has type
                   5614: @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
                   5615: 
                   5616: @findex REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT
                   5617: @item REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (@var{x})
                   5618: A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
                   5619: floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an integer value (but still
                   5620: as a floating point number).  @var{x} has type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE},
                   5621: and so does the value.
                   5622: 
                   5623: @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT
                   5624: @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (@var{x})
                   5625: A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
                   5626: floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an unsigned integer value
                   5627: (but still represented as a floating point number).  @var{x} has type
                   5628: @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, and so does the value.
                   5629: 
                   5630: @findex REAL_VALUE_ATOF
                   5631: @item REAL_VALUE_ATOF (@var{string}, @var{mode})
                   5632: A macro for a C expression which converts @var{string}, an expression of
                   5633: type @code{char *}, into a floating point number in the target machine's
                   5634: representation for mode @var{mode}.  The value has type
                   5635: @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
                   5636: 
                   5637: @findex REAL_INFINITY
                   5638: @item REAL_INFINITY
                   5639: Define this macro if infinity is a possible floating point value, and
                   5640: therefore division by 0 is legitimate.
                   5641: 
                   5642: @findex REAL_VALUE_ISINF
                   5643: @findex isinf
                   5644: @item REAL_VALUE_ISINF (@var{x})
                   5645: A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
                   5646: point value, is infinity.  The value has type @code{int}.
                   5647: By default, this is defined to call @code{isinf}.
                   5648: 
                   5649: @findex REAL_VALUE_ISNAN
                   5650: @findex isnan
                   5651: @item REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (@var{x})
                   5652: A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
                   5653: point value, is a ``nan'' (not-a-number).  The value has type
                   5654: @code{int}.  By default, this is defined to call @code{isnan}.
                   5655: @end table
                   5656: 
                   5657: @cindex constant folding and floating point
                   5658: Define the following additional macros if you want to make floating
                   5659: point constant folding work while cross compiling.  If you don't
                   5660: define them, cross compilation is still possible, but constant folding
                   5661: will not happen for floating point values.
                   5662: 
                   5663: @table @code
                   5664: @findex REAL_ARITHMETIC
                   5665: @item REAL_ARITHMETIC (@var{output}, @var{code}, @var{x}, @var{y})
                   5666: A macro for a C statement which calculates an arithmetic operation of
                   5667: the two floating point values @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type
                   5668: @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} in the target machine's representation, to
                   5669: produce a result of the same type and representation which is stored
                   5670: in @var{output} (which will be a variable).
                   5671: 
                   5672: The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}, a tree code
                   5673: which will always be one of the following: @code{PLUS_EXPR},
                   5674: @code{MINUS_EXPR}, @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR},
                   5675: @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.@refill
                   5676: 
                   5677: @cindex overflow while constant folding
                   5678: The expansion of this macro is responsible for checking for overflow.
                   5679: If overflow happens, the macro expansion should execute the statement
                   5680: @code{return 0;}, which indicates the inability to perform the
                   5681: arithmetic operation requested.
                   5682: 
                   5683: @findex REAL_VALUE_NEGATE
                   5684: @item REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (@var{x})
                   5685: A macro for a C expression which returns the negative of the floating
                   5686: point value @var{x}.  Both @var{x} and the value of the expression
                   5687: have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and are in the target machine's
                   5688: floating point representation.
                   5689: 
                   5690: There is no way for this macro to report overflow, since overflow
                   5691: can't happen in the negation operation.
                   5692: 
                   5693: @findex REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE
                   5694: @item REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (@var{mode}, @var{x})
                   5695: A macro for a C expression which converts the floating point value
                   5696: @var{x} to mode @var{mode}.
                   5697: 
                   5698: Both @var{x} and the value of the expression are in the target machine's
                   5699: floating point representation and have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
                   5700: However, the value should have an appropriate bit pattern to be output
                   5701: properly as a floating constant whose precision accords with mode
                   5702: @var{mode}.
                   5703: 
                   5704: There is no way for this macro to report overflow.
                   5705: 
                   5706: @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_INT
                   5707: @item REAL_VALUE_TO_INT (@var{low}, @var{high}, @var{x})
                   5708: A macro for a C expression which converts a floating point value
                   5709: @var{x} into a double-precision integer which is then stored into
                   5710: @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int}.
                   5711: 
                   5712: @item REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (@var{x}, @var{low}, @var{high})
                   5713: @findex REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT
                   5714: A macro for a C expression which converts a double-precision integer
                   5715: found in @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int},
                   5716: into a floating point value which is then stored into @var{x}.
                   5717: @end table
                   5718: 
                   5719: @node Misc
                   5720: @section Miscellaneous Parameters
                   5721: @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
                   5722: 
                   5723: @table @code
                   5724: @item PREDICATE_CODES
                   5725: @findex PREDICATE_CODES
                   5726: Define this if you have defined special-purpose predicates in the file
                   5727: @file{@var{machine}.c}.  This macro is called within an initializer of an
                   5728: array of structures.  The first field in the structure is the name of a
                   5729: predicate and the second field is an array of rtl codes.  For each
                   5730: predicate, list all rtl codes that can be in expressions matched by the
                   5731: predicate.  The list should have a trailing comma.  Here is an example
                   5732: of two entries in the list for a typical RISC machine:
                   5733: 
                   5734: @smallexample
                   5735: #define PREDICATE_CODES \
                   5736:   @{"gen_reg_rtx_operand", @{SUBREG, REG@}@},  \
                   5737:   @{"reg_or_short_cint_operand", @{SUBREG, REG, CONST_INT@}@},
                   5738: @end smallexample
                   5739: 
                   5740: Defining this macro does not affect the generated code (however,
                   5741: incorrect definitions that omit an rtl code that may be matched by the
                   5742: predicate can cause the compiler to malfunction).  Instead, it allows
                   5743: the table built by @file{genrecog} to be more compact and efficient,
                   5744: thus speeding up the compiler.  The most important predicates to include
                   5745: in the list specified by this macro are thoses used in the most insn
                   5746: patterns.
                   5747: 
                   5748: @findex CASE_VECTOR_MODE
                   5749: @item CASE_VECTOR_MODE
                   5750: An alias for a machine mode name.  This is the machine mode that
                   5751: elements of a jump-table should have.
                   5752: 
                   5753: @findex CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
                   5754: @item CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
                   5755: Define this macro if jump-tables should contain relative addresses.
                   5756: 
                   5757: @findex CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
                   5758: @item CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
                   5759: Define this if control falls through a @code{case} insn when the index
                   5760: value is out of range.  This means the specified default-label is
                   5761: actually ignored by the @code{case} insn proper.
                   5762: 
                   5763: @findex CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
                   5764: @item CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
                   5765: Define this to be the smallest number of different values for which it
                   5766: is best to use a jump-table instead of a tree of conditional branches.
                   5767: The default is four for machines with a @code{casesi} instruction and
                   5768: five otherwise.  This is best for most machines.
                   5769: 
                   5770: @findex WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
                   5771: @item WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
                   5772: Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
                   5773: smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
                   5774: Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
                   5775: 
                   5776: @findex LOAD_EXTEND_OP
                   5777: @item LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mode})
                   5778: Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
                   5779: memory in @var{mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
                   5780: bits outside of @var{mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
                   5781: zero-extension of the data read.  Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
                   5782: of @var{mode} for which the
                   5783: insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
                   5784: @code{NIL} for other modes.
                   5785: 
                   5786: This macro is not called with @var{mode} non-integral or with a width
                   5787: greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
                   5788: value in this case.  Do not define this macro if it would always return
                   5789: @code{NIL}.  On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
                   5790: define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
                   5791: 
                   5792: @findex IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
                   5793: @item IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
                   5794: An alias for a tree code that should be used by default for conversion
                   5795: of floating point values to fixed point.  Normally,
                   5796: @code{FIX_ROUND_EXPR} is used.@refill
                   5797: 
                   5798: @findex FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
                   5799: @item FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
                   5800: Define this macro if the same instructions that convert a floating
                   5801: point number to a signed fixed point number also convert validly to an
                   5802: unsigned one.
                   5803: 
                   5804: @findex EASY_DIV_EXPR
                   5805: @item EASY_DIV_EXPR
                   5806: An alias for a tree code that is the easiest kind of division to
                   5807: compile code for in the general case.  It may be
                   5808: @code{TRUNC_DIV_EXPR}, @code{FLOOR_DIV_EXPR}, @code{CEIL_DIV_EXPR} or
                   5809: @code{ROUND_DIV_EXPR}.  These four division operators differ in how
                   5810: they round the result to an integer.  @code{EASY_DIV_EXPR} is used
                   5811: when it is permissible to use any of those kinds of division and the
                   5812: choice should be made on the basis of efficiency.@refill
                   5813: 
                   5814: @findex MOVE_MAX
                   5815: @item MOVE_MAX
                   5816: The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
                   5817: from memory to memory.
                   5818: 
                   5819: @findex MAX_MOVE_MAX
                   5820: @item MAX_MOVE_MAX
                   5821: The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
                   5822: from memory to memory.  If this is undefined, the default is
                   5823: @code{MOVE_MAX}.  Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
                   5824: largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have at run-time.
                   5825: 
                   5826: @findex SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
                   5827: @item SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
                   5828: A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
                   5829: actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
                   5830: of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted.  When
                   5831: this macro is non-zero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
                   5832: a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
                   5833: truncates the count of a shift operation.  On machines that have
                   5834: instructions that act on bitfields at variable positions, which may
                   5835: include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
                   5836: also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
                   5837: arguments to bitfield instructions.
                   5838: 
                   5839: If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
                   5840: position (for bitfield operations), or if no variable-position bitfield
                   5841: instructions exist, you should define this macro.
                   5842: 
                   5843: However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
                   5844: only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
                   5845: bitfield operations.  Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
                   5846: such machines.  Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
                   5847: the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
                   5848: 
                   5849: You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
                   5850: 
                   5851: @findex TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
                   5852: @item TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
                   5853: A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
                   5854: ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
                   5855: bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
                   5856: operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
                   5857: 
                   5858: On many machines, this expression can be 1.
                   5859: 
                   5860: @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that".  this was
                   5861: @c to fix an overfull hbox.  --mew 10feb93
                   5862: When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
                   5863: modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
                   5864: If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
                   5865: such cases may improve things.
                   5866: 
                   5867: @findex STORE_FLAG_VALUE
                   5868: @item STORE_FLAG_VALUE
                   5869: A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
                   5870: with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
                   5871: (@samp{s@var{cond}}) when the condition is true.  This description must
                   5872: apply to @emph{all} the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns and all the
                   5873: comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
                   5874: 
                   5875: A value of 1 or -1 means that the instruction implementing the
                   5876: comparison operator returns exactly 1 or -1 when the comparison is true
                   5877: and 0 when the comparison is false.  Otherwise, the value indicates
                   5878: which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
                   5879: true.  This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
                   5880: operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
                   5881: @samp{s@var{cond}} pattern.  Either the low bit or the sign bit of
                   5882: @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on.  Presently, only those bits are used by
                   5883: the compiler.
                   5884: 
                   5885: If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or -1, the compiler will
                   5886: generate code that depends only on the specified bits.  It can also
                   5887: replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
                   5888: the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
                   5889: For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
                   5890: @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
                   5891: @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
                   5892: expression
                   5893: 
                   5894: @smallexample
                   5895: (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
                   5896: @end smallexample
                   5897: 
                   5898: @noindent
                   5899: can be converted to
                   5900: 
                   5901: @smallexample
                   5902: (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
                   5903: @end smallexample
                   5904: 
                   5905: @noindent
                   5906: where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
                   5907: tested into the sign bit.
                   5908: 
                   5909: There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
                   5910: for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
                   5911: but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction.  If you
                   5912: are trying to port GNU CC to such a machine, include an instruction to
                   5913: perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
                   5914: comparison operators and let us know
                   5915: @ifset USING
                   5916: (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs}).
                   5917: @end ifset
                   5918: @ifclear USING
                   5919: (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs,gcc.info,Using GCC}).
                   5920: @end ifclear
                   5921: 
                   5922: Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
                   5923: from a comparison (or the condition codes).  Here are rules to guide the
                   5924: choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
                   5925: to be used:
                   5926: 
                   5927: @itemize @bullet
                   5928: @item
                   5929: Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
                   5930: @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}.  It is more efficient for the compiler to
                   5931: ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
                   5932: comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
                   5933: combine the normalization with other operations.
                   5934: 
                   5935: @item
                   5936: For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or -1, with -1 being
                   5937: slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
                   5938: other machines.
                   5939: 
                   5940: @item
                   5941: As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
                   5942: exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
                   5943: others.
                   5944: 
                   5945: @item
                   5946: Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
                   5947: @end itemize
                   5948: 
                   5949: Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
                   5950: @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
                   5951: instructions.  On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
                   5952: those cases, e.g., one matching
                   5953: 
                   5954: @smallexample
                   5955: (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
                   5956: @end smallexample
                   5957: 
                   5958: Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
                   5959: condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
                   5960: @samp{s@var{cond}} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}.  On those
                   5961: machines, define the appropriate patterns.  Use the names @code{incscc}
                   5962: and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the the patterns which perform
                   5963: @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values.  See
                   5964: @file{rs6000.md} for some examples.  The GNU Superoptizer can be used to
                   5965: find such instruction sequences on other machines.
                   5966: 
                   5967: You need not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
                   5968: instructions.
                   5969: 
                   5970: @findex FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
                   5971: @item FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
                   5972: A C expression that gives a non-zero floating point value that is
                   5973: returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
                   5974: Define this macro on machine that have comparison operations that return
                   5975: floating-point values.  If there are no such operations, do not define
                   5976: this macro.
                   5977: 
                   5978: @findex Pmode
                   5979: @item Pmode
                   5980: An alias for the machine mode for pointers.  Normally the definition
                   5981: can be
                   5982: 
                   5983: @smallexample
                   5984: #define Pmode SImode
                   5985: @end smallexample
                   5986: 
                   5987: @findex FUNCTION_MODE
                   5988: @item FUNCTION_MODE
                   5989: An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
                   5990: being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions.  On most machines this
                   5991: should be @code{QImode}.
                   5992: 
                   5993: @findex INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD
                   5994: @item INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD (@var{decl})
                   5995: A C expression for the maximum number of instructions above which the
                   5996: function @var{decl} should not be inlined.  @var{decl} is a
                   5997: @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node.
                   5998: 
                   5999: The default definition of this macro is 64 plus 8 times the number of
                   6000: arguments that the function accepts.  Some people think a larger
                   6001: threshold should be used on RISC machines.
                   6002: 
                   6003: @findex SCCS_DIRECTIVE
                   6004: @item SCCS_DIRECTIVE
                   6005: Define this if the preprocessor should ignore @code{#sccs} directives
                   6006: and print no error message.
                   6007: 
                   6008: @findex NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
                   6009: @item NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
                   6010: Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C.
                   6011: This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
                   6012: C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
                   6013: @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
                   6014: 
                   6015: @findex HANDLE_PRAGMA
                   6016: @findex #pragma
                   6017: @findex pragma
                   6018: @item HANDLE_PRAGMA (@var{stream})
                   6019: Define this macro if you want to implement any pragmas.  If defined, it
                   6020: should be a C statement to be executed when @code{#pragma} is seen.  The
                   6021: argument @var{stream} is the stdio input stream from which the source
                   6022: text can be read.
                   6023: 
                   6024: It is generally a bad idea to implement new uses of @code{#pragma}.  The
                   6025: only reason to define this macro is for compatibility with other
                   6026: compilers that do support @code{#pragma} for the sake of any user
                   6027: programs which already use it.
                   6028: 
                   6029: @findex DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
                   6030: @item DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
                   6031: Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in identifier
                   6032: names.  The value should be 0, 1, or 2.  0 means @samp{$} is not allowed
                   6033: by default; 1 means it is allowed by default if @samp{-traditional} is
                   6034: used; 2 means it is allowed by default provided @samp{-ansi} is not used.
                   6035: 1 is the default; there is no need to define this macro in that case.
                   6036: 
                   6037: @findex NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
                   6038: @item NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
                   6039: Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
                   6040: @samp{$} in label names.  By default constructors and destructors in
                   6041: G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers.  If this macro is defined,
                   6042: @samp{.} is used instead.
                   6043: 
                   6044: @findex NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
                   6045: @item NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
                   6046: Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
                   6047: @samp{.} in label names.  By default constructors and destructors in G++
                   6048: have names that use @samp{.}.  If this macro is defined, these names
                   6049: are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
                   6050: 
                   6051: @findex DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
                   6052: @item DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
                   6053: Define this macro if the target system expects every program's @code{main}
                   6054: function to return a standard ``success'' value by default (if no other
                   6055: value is explicitly returned).
                   6056: 
                   6057: The definition should be a C statement (sans semicolon) to generate the
                   6058: appropriate rtl instructions.  It is used only when compiling the end of
                   6059: @code{main}.
                   6060: 
                   6061: @item HAVE_ATEXIT
                   6062: @findex HAVE_ATEXIT
                   6063: Define this if the target system supports the function
                   6064: @code{atexit} from the ANSI C standard.  If this is not defined,
                   6065: and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} is not defined, a default
                   6066: @code{exit} function will be provided to support C++.
                   6067: 
                   6068: @item EXIT_BODY
                   6069: @findex EXIT_BODY
                   6070: Define this if your @code{exit} function needs to do something
                   6071: besides calling an external function @code{_cleanup} before
                   6072: terminating with @code{_exit}.  The @code{EXIT_BODY} macro is
                   6073: only needed if netiher @code{HAVE_ATEXIT} nor
                   6074: @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} are defined.
                   6075: 
                   6076: @findex INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED
                   6077: @item INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
                   6078: Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
                   6079: delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
                   6080: even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
                   6081: @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GNU CC knows that 
                   6082: every @code{call_insn} has this behavior.  On machines where some @code{insn} 
                   6083: or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior, 
                   6084: you should define this macro.
                   6085: 
                   6086: You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
                   6087: 
                   6088: @findex INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED
                   6089: @item INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
                   6090: Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
                   6091: delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
                   6092: even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.  
                   6093: @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}.  On machines where
                   6094: some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
                   6095: are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
                   6096: define this macro.  Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move 
                   6097: instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay 
                   6098: slot of @var{insn}.
                   6099: 
                   6100: You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
                   6101: @end table

unix.superglobalmegacorp.com

This archive runs on limited infrastructure. Preserving old code on modern bandwidth. Automated agents are requested to crawl responsibly.